Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 2001-R0354 - Contract For Police Dept. Renovations - Hunter Construction Company - 09_13_2001Resolution No. 2001-RO354 September 13, 2001 Item No. 51 RESOLUTION BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a contract for police department renovations Phase III -A, ITB #187-01/RS, by and between the City of Lubbock and Hunter Construction Company of Lubbock, Texas, and related documents. Said contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 13th ATTEST: Rebecca. Garza, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Vi 41bg�� Victor Kilmait Purchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: William de Haas/f Contract Manager/Attorney g0kcdocs/Hunter Const Co.res September 4, 2001 day of September 92001. 4444 Z_&_ WINDY SI ON, MAYOR No Text r�* ITB #187-011RS, Addendum #2 City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13T" STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH:(806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM #2 ITB #187-011RS City of Lubbock Police Department Renovations Phase IIIA MAILED TO VENDOR: August 15, 2001 CLOSE DATE: August 23, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find attached the five page addendum issued by Parkhill, Smith and Cooper. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806)775-2164 or Email to: RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY F LUB OCK 44nShuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. 187-011Rsadd2 .................. .................. ... .................. �1 ■ II ■_J/ a 1■ ■i • 1\ '4■1 1-J■ ■I I■� ll I.■■■ ■I ■.■ram\ "1 II 1■ ■I ■.■I � 1 11 1■ 111 post Al..' down ussommumanommummus ADDENDUM NO.1 TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders PROJECT: Police Square Renovations Phase III -A Administration DATE: August 15, 2001 PSC Job No: 03.8792.00 Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans and Project Manual. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and modifies the original. Bidding Documents dated June 27, 2001 as noted below: This Addendum consists of 3 page(s), plus Id'supplemental drawings. SPECIFICATIONS OW SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1. SECTION 2.1, A a. Add the following: "3. All frames with glass shall be 45 minute rated." 2. SECTION 2.1, B a. Add the following: "2. All frames with glass shall be 45 minute rated. " 3. SECTION 2.2, C . a. Add the following: "6. Al frames with glass shall be 45 minute rated." SECTION 08700 DOOR HARDWARE ■■. 1. SECTION 303 HARDWARE SCHEDULE a. Change HW-2 as follows: i. Change the Schlage Lock Set to a Schlage Cylinder 20-057 626 finish ii. Add Von Duprin Electric Strike 611FSE x 24VDC 626 finish iii. Add Von Duprin Exit Device 992LF x 992LF LCxLS 626 finish P"' iv. Add Hager Kickplate 190S 10"04" 630 finish (@ 17 & 18 only) b. Change HW-4 as follows: i. Change the Schlage Lock Set to Schlage Cylinder 20-057 626 finish ii. Add Von Duprin Electric Strike 611FSE x 24VDC 626 finish iii. . Add Von Duprin Exit Device 992LF x 992LF LCxLS 626 finish iv. Add Hager Kickplate 190S 10"x34" 630 finish ^" C. Change HW-5 as follows: w-• PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 42.22 85" Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500 '""" Lubbock ElPaso Midland Amarillo No Text a: r■ i. Change the Schlage Lever Lockset to Schlage Cylinder 20-057 626 finish ii. Add Von Duprin Electric Strike 611FSE x 24VDC 626 finish SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 1. SECTION 2. 1, C ACOUSTIC UNITS a. Delete Type C2 from this section. SECTION 09900 PAINTING 1. SECTION 3.11 COLOR SELECTION SCHEDULE a. Add the following: Refer to Section 09915 for color selections. DRAWINGS SHEET A-101 1. Change NOTE 9 to read as follows: "SPLINE CEILING". Delete reference_ to carpet and VCT. 2. Add the following to the GENERAL NOTES: "B THE PROJECT AREA HAS ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS (ACM) UNDER THE CARPET. THE CONTRACTOR WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE ABATEMENT OF SUCH MATERIAL, HOWEVER, THE CONTRACTOR WILL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE REMOVAL OF ALL CEILINGS, WALL PARTITIONS, AND WALL FLOOR TRACK MATERIAL AS REQUIRED AND SHOWN IN THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT REMOVE ANY FLOOR COVERING MATERIALS, INCLUDING CARPET, FLOOR TILE, AND/OR MASTIC. THE REMOVE OF THE FLOOR COVERING MATERIALS WILL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER. AFTER ALL WALL PARTITIONS AND RELATED ITEMS ARE REMOVED BY THE CONTRACTOR, THE OWNER WILL REQUIRE APPROXIMATELY 14 CONSECUTIVE WORKING DAYS TO ABATE THE ACM. AFTER THE ACM IS ABATED, THE C ONTRACTOR WILL BE ALLOWED TO RETURN TO WORK IN THE AREA. NO WORK WILL BE ALLOWED IN THE PROJECT AREA DURING THE ABATEMENT PERIOD BY ANYONE OTHER AN CITY STAFF, ACM ABATEMENT CONTRACTORS, AND CONSULTANTS. " 3. Delete NOTE 18 from DEMOLITION PLAN and from DEMOLITION NOTES. SHEET A-103 1. At door 18, change the hollow metal designation from HM-1 to HM-2. 2. At door 17, change the hollow metal designation from HM-2 to HM-3. 3. On plan 1/A-103, in Mechanical 221, change keyed note 10 to 8 and add the following to the Keyed Notes: "8. Seal partition tight to deck above for a 1-hour fire resistive rating. " 4. See attached drawing AD 1-01 and AD 1-02 for additional keyed notes referencing drawings 6/A-103 and 7/A-103. PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 4222 851' Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500 P14 Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo i �^ 5. Add the following to the ELEVATION KEYED NOTES: a. " 16. One -hour GWB partition, refer to floor plans." b. " 17. One *hour partition beyond, refer to Section 9/A5-01 " C. "18. One -hour partition, refer to Section 9/A-105" d. "19. Existing saw -tooth ceiling beyond." e. "20. Bottom of saw -tooth ceiling meets top of aluminum railing. " f. "2 1. These horizontals shown in section crossing the corridor." SHEET A-104 1. In corridor 222, change NOTE 7 to NOTE 1. Provide new lay -in ceiling to match existing in this corridor where ductwork above ceiling is shown. SHEET M 1 & M2 1. Refer to the drawings, sheets Ml and M2. In the area south of the equipment room, labeled 'FUTURE FINISH -OUT SPACE (SHELL SPACE)" on sheet M2, note that ductwork shown to be removed from this area shall not be removed under this phase of the work, but shall be abandoned. Abandon the existing ductwork serving this area from the old multi -zone unit. Remove the ductwork that interferes with the installation of the 60x28 supply and 40 x 28 return air duct with sound trap shown on sheet M2. Note that all ductwork serving the area to be renovated under'this phase, and any ductwork interfering with new ductwork to be installed under this phase shall be removed and not abandoned. SHEET E2 1. Add four (4) exit lights to the second floor lighting plan. These four additional lights shall be located in the area west of the renovated area on this sheet. The exact location of each sign shall be determined by the Electrical Engineer prior to installation. All necessary devices, wiring and circuitry to be provided and installed by the contractor. CLARIFICATIONS SHEET E3 1. ENSURE conduit from the J-box above ceiling to the door strike plate of each door shown to have a J-box above to allow card reader compatible hardware to be installed. Reference NOTE 2 on SHEET E3. 2. On SHEET A-104, on ceiling plan 1/A-104, the 2x2 grid in the upper left-hand corner of the drawing is existing computer flooring located in the Traffic Engineering office. This is not new ceiling as part of this project. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 pee PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 4222 85" Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500 °'^ Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo fo-SI'l o0-zbLs8-f,Q Noll INS-1;a IS 1111A 11 1 "' I I i 1i/A CAA /ye, .5c FRz-,V , r (oN b/A- 103 \ 14/A-501 o3 - g-tgz-oo Q - 02 �-IS-OI City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13T" STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 http://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ITB #187-01/RS, Addendum #1 ADDENDUM #1 . ITB #187-01 /RS City of Lubbock Police Department Renovations Phase IIIA MAILED TO VENDOR: July 24, 2001 n OLD CLOSE DATE: July 31, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M. -^ NEW CLOSE DATE: August 23, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. The closing date has been changed from July 31, 2001 at 2:00 P. M. to the new closing date of August 23, 2001 at 2:00 P. M. All requests for additional information or.clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806)775-2164 or Email to: RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY F LUBBOCK ,,,Ron CITY, Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. 187-01/RSaddi CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT RENOVATIONS PHASE III -A ITB #187-01/RS " A City Of Planned Progress" CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas Ar! A i t' CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID FOR r_ .J TITLE: CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT RENOVATIONS PHASE III -A ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS ITB NUMBER: 187-01/RS PROJECT NUMBER: 9616.9211.30000 oft CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT r._ INDEX 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS 4. PAYMENT BOND 5. PERFORMANCE BOND 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE !j 7. CONTRACT 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT I 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 10. SPECIFICATIONS A w NOTICE TO BIDDERS A&M NOTICE TO BIDDERS ITB #187-011RS Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 31st day of July, 2001, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project with a budget amount of $335,000.00: "CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT RENOVATIONS PHASE III -A" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to ensure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, before the expiration of the date above first written. Bids are due at 2:00 o'clock p.m. on the 31st day of July, 2001, and the City of Lubbock City Council will consider the bids on the 9th day of August, 2001, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without p recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. • It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a non -mandatory pre -bid conference on 18th day of July, 2001 at 10:00 o'clock a.m., in the Purchasing Conference Room L04, Lubbock, Texas. k' Bidders may view the plans and specifications without charge at Lubbock City Hall, 1625 13`h Street, Lubbock, Texas, Purchasing Department, Room L-04. Plans and specifications may be obtained by the bidder for a $100.00 refundable deposit per set. Plans and specifications may be obtained from Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc., 4222 85th Street, Lubbock, Texas 79423, Phone: (806) 473-2200. Plans and specifications will be shipped at the bidder's expense. If bidder requires overnight or second day expedited method parcel shipment, the bidder will incur shipping charges and must furnish the name of the service to be used and the bidder's account number. Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775-2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK VICTOR KILMAN PURCHASING MANAGER 1�1 �� ,:rj ;� rd GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID DELIVERY. TIME & DATE 1.1 The City of Lubbock is seeking written and sealed competitive bids to furnish CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT RENOVATIONS PHASE III -A per the attached specifications and contract documents. Sealed bids will be received no later than 2:00 p.m. CST, the 31 st day of July, 2001 at the office listed below. Any bid received after the date and hour specified will be rejected and returned unopened to the bidder. Each bid and supporting documentation must be in a sealed envelope or container plainly labeled in the lower left-hand corner: "ITB #187-01/RS, CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT RENOVATIONS PHASE III -A" and the bid opening date and time. Bidders must also include their company name and address on the outside of the envelope or container. Bids must be addressed to: �^ Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager City of Lubbock 1625 13th Street, Room L-04 Lubbock, Texas 79401 1.2 Bidders are responsible for making certain bids are delivered to the Purchasing Department. Mailing of a bid does not ensure that the bid will be delivered on time or delivered at all. If bidder does not hand deliver bid, we suggest that he/she use some sort of delivery service that provides a receipt. 1.3 Bids will be accepted in person, by United States Mail, by United Parcel Service, or by private courier service. No bids will be accepted by oral communication, telephone, electronic mail, telegraphic transmission, or telefacsimile transmission. THE CITY WILL NOT ACCEPT FAX BIDS. 1.4 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to postpone the date and time for opening bids through an addendum. 2 PRE -BID MEETING 2.1 For the purpose of familiarizing bidders with the requirements, answering questions, and issuing addenda as needed for the clarification of the Invitation to Bid (ITB) documents, a non-mandatoy pre -bid meeting will be held at 10:00 a.m.. July 18th. 2001 in Purchasing Conference Room L04, Lubbock. Texas. All personsattending the meeting will be asked to identify themselves and the prospective bidder they represent. 2.2 It is the bidder's responsibility to attend the pre -bid meeting though the meeting is not mandatory. The City will not be responsible for providing information discussed at the pre -bid meeting to bidders who do not attend the pre -bid meeting. 3 ADDENDA & MODIFICATIONS 3.1 Any changes, additions, or clarifications to the ITB are made by written bid addenda. 3.2 Any bidder in doubt as to the true meaning of any part of the specifications or other documents may request an interpretation thereof from the Purchasing Department. At the request of the bidder, or in the event the Purchasing Department deems the interpretation to be substantive, the interpretation will be made by written addendum issued by the Purchasing Department. Such addendum issued by the Purchasing Department will be sent to all bidders receiving the original Invitation to Bid (ITB) and will become part of the bid package having the same binding effect as provisions of the original bid. NO VERBAL EXPLANATIONS OR INTERPRETATIONS WILL BE BINDING. In order to have a request for interpretation considered, the request must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department no later than five (5) days before the bid closing date. 3.3 All addenda, amendments, and interpretations of this solicitation shall be in writing. The City of Lubbock shall not be legally bound by any amendment or interpretation that is not in writing. Only information supplied by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Department in writing or in this ITB should be used in preparing bid responses. All contacts that a bidder may have had before or after receipt of this ITB with any individuals, employees, or representatives of the City and any information that may have been read in any news media or seen or heard in any communication facility regarding this bid should be disregarded in preparing responses. i 12 AO*: 4 EXAMINATION OF DOCUMENTS AND REQUIREMENTS 4.1 Each bidder shall carefully examine all ITB documents and thoroughly familiarize itself with all requirements before submitting a bid to ensure that their bid meets the intent of these specifications. 4.2 Before submitting a bid, each bidder shall be responsible for making all investigations and examinations that are necessary to ascertain conditions and requirements affecting the requirements of this Invitation to Bid. Failure to make such investigations and examinations shall not relieve the bidder from obligation to comply, in every detail, with all provisions and requirements of the Invitation to Bid. 4.3 Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Purchasing Manager and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Purchasing Manager prior to the opening of bids, then it I hall be deemed that the bidder fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If bidder does not notify Purchasing Manager before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 5 BID PREPARATION COSTS 5.1 Issuance of this ITB does not commit the City of Lubbock, in any way, to pay any costs incurred in the preparation and submission of a bid. 5.2 The issuance of this ITB does not obligate the City of Lubbock to enter into contract for any services or equipment. 5.3 All costs related to the preparation and submission of a bid shall be paid by the bidder. 6 TRADE SECRETS CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION AND THE TEXAS PUBLIC INFORMATION ACT 6.1 If you consider any portion of your bid to be privileged or confidential by statute or judicial decision, including trade secrets and commercial or financial information, clearly identify those portions. 6.2 The City of Lubbock will honor your notations of trade secrets and confidential information and decline to release such information initially, but please note that the final determination of whether a particular portion of your bid is in fact a trade secret or commercial or financial information that may be withheld from public inspection will be made by the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction. In the event a public information request is received for a portion of your bid that you have marked as being confidential information, you will be notified of such request and you will be required to justify your legal position in writing to the Texas Attorney General pursuant to Section 552.305 of the Government Code. In the event that it is determined by opinion or order of the Texas Attorney General or a court of competent jurisdiction that such information is in fact not privileged and confidential under Section 552.110 of the Government Code and Section 252.049 of the Local Government Code, then such information will be made available to the requester. 6.3 Marking your entire bid CONFIDENTIAL/PROPRIETARY is not in conformance with the Texas Open Records Act. 7 LICENSES, PERMITS. TAXES { The price or prices for the work shall include full compensation for all taxes, permits, etc. that the bidder is or may be required to pay. 8 CONFLICT OF INTEREST 8.1 The bidder shall not offer or accept gifts or anything of value nor enter into any business arrangement with any employee, official or agent of the City of Lubbock. 8.2 By signing and executing this bid, the bidder certifies and represents to the City the bidder has not offered, conferred or agreed to confer any pecuniary benefit or other thing of value for the receipt of special treatment, advantage, information, recipient's decision, opinion, recommendation, vote or any other exercise of discretion concerning this bid. '"'� 3 9 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 9.1 All work covered by the contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. 9.2 All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. 10 PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by - the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge or forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice _. to Bidders. 11 BIDDER INQUIRIES AND CLARIFICATION OF REQUIREMENTS 11.1 It is the intent and purpose of the City of Lubbock that this request permit competitive bids. It shall be the bidder's responsibility to advise the Purchasing Manager if any language, requirements, etc., or any ... combinations thereof, inadvertently restricts or limits the requirements stated in this ITB to a single source. Such notification must be submitted in writing and must be received by the City of Lubbock Purchasing Office no later than five (5) calendar days before the bid closing date. A review of such notifications will be made. P 11.2 NO BIDDER SHALL REQUEST ANY INFORMATION VERBALLY. ALL REQUESTS FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION OR CLARIFICATION CONCERNING THIS INVITATION TO BID (ITB) MUST BE SUBMITTED IN WRITING NO LATER THAN FIVE (5) CALENDAR DAYS PRIOR TO THE BID CLOSING DATE AND ADDRESSED TO: RON SHUFFIELD, SENIOR BUYER City of Lubbock 1625 13" Street Lubbock, Texas 79401 Fax: (806) 775-2164 Email: rshuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us 12 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION 12.1 The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within TWO HUNDRED TEN (210) CONSECUTIVE CALENDAR DAYS from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. 12.2 The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to ensure completion of the project within the time specified. 13 PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 14 AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. 15 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve 4 :e-- the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality, which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 16 GUARANTEES 16.1 All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). 16.2 Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. 16.3 The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub- contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. 16.4 The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 17 PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. 18 PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. (c) Equipment schedule. 19 TEXAS STATE SALES TAX 19.1 This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. 19.2 The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. r 5 4- 20 PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 21 BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 22 EXPLOSIVES 22.1 The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume full responsibility for all damage, which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. 22.2 Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. 22.3 In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such —^ notice shall be given sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 23 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 24 INSURANCE 24.1 The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted before contract execution. 24.2 The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional insured, or in the - alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to provide W 0^ ro to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. 25 LABOR AND WORKING HOURS 25.1 Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate that must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: 26 27 28 26.1.1 The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. 26.1.2 Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. 25.2 Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. 25.3 In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered. PREPARATION FOR BID 28.1 The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. 7 30 28.2 If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. 28.3 Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: 28.3.1 Bidder's name 28.3.2 Bid for (description of the project). 28A Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time before the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 28.5 Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (a) Notice to Bidders. (b) General Instructions to Bidders. (c) Bidder's Submittal. (d) Statutory Bond (if required). (e) Contract Agreement. (f) General Conditions. (g) Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock about the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: (a) The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. (b) The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. (c) The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. (d) The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. !a 12 31 BID AWARD 31.1 The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any or all bids, reject any particular item on a bid, and to waive immaterial formalities and to accept the offer most advantageous to the City of Lubbock in its sole discretion. Unless otherwise specified herein, the City shall award the bid based on the Total Bid Amount. 31.2 All bids are evaluated for compliance with specifications before the bid price is considered. Response to specifications is primary in determining the best low bid. Failure to comply with the specifications may result in disqualification of the bid. 31.3 In case of tie bids, preference will be given to local bidders. Consistent and continued tie bidding may be cause for rejection of bids by the City of Lubbock and/or investigation by the Attorney General to determine possible Anti -Trust violations. 31.4 Before the City may award a bid to a nonresident bidder, the nonresident bidder's bid must be lower than lowest bid submitted by a responsible Texas bidder by the same margin or amount that a Texas bidder would be required to underbid the nonresident bidder in the nonresident bidders' home state. 31.5 Any contract made, or purchase order issued, as a result of this Invitation to Bid, shall be entered into the P_ State of Texas and under the laws of the State of Texas. In connection with the performance of work, the Bidder agrees to comply with the Fair Labor Standard Act, Equal Opportunity Employment Act, and all other applicable Federal, State, and Local laws, regulations, and executive orders to the extent that the same may be applicable. 31.6 NO INDIVIDUAL OF ANY USING DEPARTMENT HAS THE AUTHORITY TO LEGALLY AND/OR FINANCIALLY COMMIT THE CITY TO ANY CONTRACT, AGREEMENT OR PURCHASE ORDER FOR ., GOODS OR SERVICES, UNLESS SPECIFICALLY SANCTIONED BY THE REQUIREMENTS OF THIS INVITATION TO BID. l �J F^ 9 No Text F" BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT DATE: August 23, 2001 Pf )JECT NUMBER: #187-011RS - CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT RENOVATIONS PHASE III -A Bid -of Hunter Construction Company (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) G Mitlemen: The Bidder, incompliance with your Invitation to Bid for the construction of a CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE DF"'ARTMENT RENOVATIONS PHASE III -A having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, n( ce to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby in,Lands to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, scifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover ai. oxpenses incurred in perfo ing th .,rk r uired under the contract documents. c� ($ 1 d; G017 Pei NTERIALS: F4. SERVICES: 4-h Y7 /n�fi�®� /I1�rw'/ram 77�'M/��l> �ii ���� / .i l f M77 — ----r T TAIL BID: --------------- (Amount shall be shown ' 'both words and n rals. In case of discrepancy, the a unt ::Zh rds shall g` o er n Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 210 (TWO HUNDRED TEN) consecutive c--iendar days thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees tc / to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $0 (ZERO) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set fu, th herein above for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shall be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 28 of the General Instructions to Bidders. rM Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days .� `.er the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the ins, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to ummence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. 1 Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within fifteen (15) days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ ) or a Bid Bond in the sum of �.iv —p E� t e�€ bid Dollars ($ 5 �Qz Ri t, which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, insurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within fifteen (15) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by Bidder shall be bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. Pursuant to Texas Local Government Code 252.043(a), a competitive sealed bid that has been opened may not be changed for the purpose of correcting an error in the bid price. THEREFORE, ANY CORRECTIONS TO THE BID PRICE MUST BE MADE ON THE BID SUBMITTAL FORM PRIOR TO BID OPENING. (Seal if. Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: �■* Secretary Joanne Thomasson Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. r.,nQ Date 7/24/nj Addenda No. Two Date R/1 5/n1 Addenda No. Date Addenda No. — Date M/WBE Firm: Date:- Au AthAdized Signature Jim D. Hunter, President (Printed or Typed Name) Hunter Construction Company Company P.C. Box 2587 Address Lubbock Lubbr -k City, County 79408 State Zip Code Telephone: p_ - 7gq_4-�j9 Fax: 806 793-6367 °�"" 2 BIDDER: Hunter Construction Company PC Box 2587 Lubbock, TX 79408-2587 LIST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Minority Owned Yes No West Texas Masonry ❑ N 2.,, RPM Drywall ❑ 3.7 Simmons Painting ❑ � 4. LVR .Carpet ❑ 5. �f :. ❑ 09 6. �,,,,,, air- r - < r� [� ❑ -� �< 7.° Lubbock Glass & Mirror ❑ PI 9. ❑ ❑ 10. ❑ ❑ ■ 3 CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Bidder And Attached to Bid Submittal I, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been reviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, 1 will be able to, within fifteen (15) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, furnish a valid insurance ertificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. , it Jim D. Hunter, President r (Signature) Contractor (Print) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM NAME: Hunter Construction Company (Print or Type ) CONTRACTOR'S FIRM ADDRESS: P.C. Box 2587 Lubbock, TX 79408 Name of Agent/Broker: The InWest Group/Lubbock Address of Agent/Broker: PC Box. 53910 City/State/Zip: Lubbock TX 79453 Agent/Broker Telephone Number: ( 806 ) 785-1988 MM Date: August.23, 2001 NOTE TO CONTRACTOR If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, Tease contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165. BID #187-011RS - CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT RENOVATIONS PHASE III -A P" 4 PM CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION AND - ACKNOWLEDGMENT Contractor/Company Name Hunter Construction Company Contractor/Company Representative: (Print) Jim D. Hunter, President Description of work: CITY OF LUBBCCK POLICE DEPARR= RENCVATICNS PHASE III —A ITB #187-01/RS - Municipal Square, located at 916 Texas Avenue, in Lubbock, contains Asbestos Containing Building Materials (ACBM). The description of known materials and locations are listed below. Type / Location: Pipe fitting insulation, mudded joints / Rm. #'s B7, B29, B32 PB 102, 110, 114, & MC 13 5 Type / Location: 9 X 9 floor tile & mastic, beige / Rm. #'s B2, 4, 10, 15, 16, 22, 23, 27; 127, 128, 129A-132, 203, 241-245, 248, & 250 Type / Location: 12 X 12 floor tile, white with gray accents / Rm. #'s B 17 Type / Location: 9 X 9 floor tile, white with light & dark accents / Rm. # 132 ..a Type / Location: 9 X 9 floor tile, tan/light green/mastic / Rm. #'s IS1, & 9-32 Type / Location: Type / Location: Type / Location: In no way should the above be considered a complete and/or exhaustive list of asbestos in this building. Certain materials containing asbestos may be enclosed behind walls and be hidden from view. Any material uncovered during maintenance project that is suspected of containing asbestos should be reported to the City of ubbock acilities Management Department, and dealt with according to S to and Feder asbe, os law ./, -n.ly trained and licensed contractors may perform work thtisturbs a�to a><n•�g materials (ACM). Signature: ` ! Date: The completed, iped 4. must be sent to the Facilities Management Department, and will be added to this facility's Management Plan. ffm BID OR PROPOSAL BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, Hunter Construction Company INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation organized and doing business under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Arizona, and duly licensed for the purpose of making, guaranteeing or becoming sole surety upon bonds or undertakings required or authorized by the laws of the State of Texas as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called the Obligee) in the just and full sum of ------------------------------ Five Percent of Greatest Amount Bid ---------------------------------------- Dollars ($ -------- (5%)------------ ) lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which well and truly to be made, we hereby bind ourselves and each of our successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly be these presents. THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, WHEREAS, the above bounden Principal as aforesaid, is about to hand in and submit the Obligee a bid or proposal for the City of Lubbock Police Department Renovations -Phase III in accordance with the plans and specifications filed in the office of the obligee and under the notice inviting proposals therefore. NOW, THEREFORE, if the bid or proposal of said principal shall be accepted, and the contract for such work be awarded to the principal thereupon by the said obligee, and said principal shall enter into a contract and bond for the completion of said work as required by law, then this obligation to be null and void: otherwise to be and remain in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, said Principal and said Surety have caused th#se presents to be duly signed and sealed this 23rd August 20 01 - Hunter da JKMJ. Hunter, President SHIN N INT RNATIONAL INS RAN OMPANY By G BDB 600201 CaraD. Hancock Attorney In Oact W PROAMITE11 T0.PA0T0V91P'1'T&1S•• • NAS SURETY GROUP NORTH AMERICAN SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT North American Specialty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under laws of the State of New Hampshire, and having its principal office in the City of Manchester, New Hampshire, and Washington International Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona and having its principal office in the city of Itasca, Illinois, each does hereby make, constitute and appoint: Kevin Dunn, Cara D. Hancock, Fred Davis, Harold D. Binggeli jointly and / or severally Its true and lawful Attorney(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for and on its behalf and as its act and deed, bonds or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalf of each of said Companies, as surety, on contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law, regulation, contract or otherwise, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract or suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the °^ amount of TEN MILLION ($10,000,000.00) DOLLARS ~ This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of >+• Directors of both North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company at meetings duly called and held on the 2e of March, 2000: "RESOLVED, that any two of the President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary be, and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a Power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of surety, and that each or any of them hereby is authorized to attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney and to attach therein the seal of the Company; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any M certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with regard to any bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached" IN WITNESS WHEREOF, North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company have caused their official seals to be hereunto affixed, and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 25 day of JULY 20 00. `````pilll��i/,// W.6 r G �^* SEAL at = w y 1973 arc o = . uuruulan�a• e+s State of Illinois County of Cook SS: By By North American Specialty Insurance Company Washington International Insurance Company Daniel G. Gibson Steven P. Anderson OFFICJAL SEAL SMi YAN A PATEL NOTARY Kwuc, RATE OF aJ.{N01e kw ODwMRlEr -W E]O'/1l60t/1EW2 a�tfOHA(i f. -"CORPORATE - g'=__ :a ?'SEAL s y M¢ANiI • a Yasmin A. Patel, Notary Public 25 day of NLY . 20 00 , before me, a Notary Public personally appeared and Daniel G. Gibson Steven P. Anderson personally know to me, who being by me duly sworn, acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of their respective companies. I, Robert I. Cate , the duly elected Assistant Secretary of North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney given by said North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, which is still in full force and'effect. °s° IN WITNESS WIiEREOF, I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Companies this 2 3 may of AUGUST , 20 01 Jul-24-01 12:07pm From -CITY OF LUBBOCK-PURCHASING Pon City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 IV STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH (866)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 htip://purchasing-ci.lubbock.tx.us 8067752164 T-121 P.01/01 F-804 ITB #187-011RS, Addendum 01 ADDENDUM #1 IT6 #187-01 /RS City of Lubbock Police Department Renovations Phase IIIA MANED TO VENDOR: July 24, 2001 OLD CLOSE DATE: July 31, 2001 a 2:00 P.M. NEW CLOSE DATE: August 23, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITS documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. The closing date has been changed from July 31, 2001 at 2:00 P. M. to the new closing date of August 23, 2001 at 2:00 P. M. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Sheffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be taxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: RShuffield@msiI.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, 4ShCITYFLUBBOCK onufield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. 187-01JRSadd1 ITB #187-01/RS, Addendum #2 P"^ City of Lubbock PURCHASING DEPARTMENT ROOM L04, MUNICIPAL BUILDING 1625 13T" STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79401 PH: (806)775-2167 FAX:(806)775-2164 hftp://purchasing.ci.lubbock.tx.us ADDENDUM #2 ITB #187-01 /RS City of Lubbock Police Department Renovations Phase IIIA MAILED TO VENDOR: August 15, 2001 CLOSE DATE: August 23, 2001 @ 2:00 P. M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find attached the five page addendum issued by Parkhill, Smith and Cooper. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to : (806)775-2164 or Email to: RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us THANK YOU, CITY FLUB OCK on Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID. 187-01/Rsadd2 . .................. uouuorruuu ,� aaaaaaaaaruruu orrrunrruuur rl • I� '\r1 IL_Jr �1 0:71 ,a is in rl .aal � 1 It Ir rl rar\ I■. Ir rr.rnrs.ru..o■ uu00000rur uuuoaaouou ADDENDUM NO.1 .:.: TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders PROJECT: Police Square Renovations Phase III -A Administration DATE: August 15, 2001 PSC Job No: 03.8792.00 r Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans and Project Manual. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and modifies the original. Bidding Documents dated June 27, 2001 as noted below: This Addendum consists of 3 page(s), plus 0 supplemental drawings. SPECIFICATIONS SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 1. SECTION 2.1, A a. Add the following: "3. All frames with glass shall be 45 minute rated." 2. SECTION 2.1, B a. Add the following: "2. All frames with glass shall be 45 minute rated." 3. SECTION 2.2, C a. Add the following: "6. Al frames with glass shall be 45 minute rated." SECTION 08700 DOOR HARDWARE 1. SECTION 303 HARDWARE SCHEDULE a. Change HW-2 as follows: i. Change the Schlage Lock Set to a Schlage Cylinder 20-057 626 finish ii. Add Von Duprin Electric Strike 611FSE x 24VDC 626 finish iii. Add Von Duprin Exit Device 992LF x 992LF LCxLS 626 finish iv, Add Hager Kickplate 190S 10"04" 630 finish (@ 17 & 18 only) b. Change HW-4 as follows: i. Change the Schlage Lock Set to Schlage Cylinder.20-057 626 finish ii. Add Von Duprin Electric Strike 611FSE x 24VDC 626 finish iii. . Add Von Duprin Exit Device 992LF x 992LF LCxLS 626 finish iv. Add Hager Kickplate 190S 10"04" 630 finish C. Change HW-5 as follows: PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 4222 851" Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500 Lubbock ElPaso Midland Amarillo i. Change the Schlage Lever Lockset to Schlage Cylinder 20-057 626 finish ii. Add Von Duprin Electric Strike 611FSE x 24VDC 626 finish SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 1. SECTION 2. 1, C ACOUSTIC UNITS a. Delete Type C2 from this section. SECTION 09900 PAINTING 1. SECTION 3.11 COLOR SELECTION SCHEDULE a. Add the following: Refer to Section 09915 for color selections. DRAWINGS SHEET A-101 ., 1. Change NOTE 9 to read as follows: "SPLINE CEILING". Delete reference to carpet and VCT. 2. Add the following to the GENERAL NOTES: 'B THE PROJECT AREA HAS ,., ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS (ACM) UNDER THE CARPET. THE CONTRACTOR WILL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE ABATEMENT OF SUCH MATERIAL, HOWEVER, THE CONTRACTOR WILT. B5RESPONSIBLE FOR THE REMOVAL OF ALL CEILINGS, WALL PARTITIONS, AND WALL FLOOR TRACK MATERIAL AS REQUIRED AND SHOWN IN THE PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. THE CONTRACTOR SHALL NOT REMOVE ANY FLOOR COVERING MATERIALS, INCLUDINGCARPB'T;' WOkTILE, AND/OR MASTIC. THE REMOVE OF THE FLOOR COVERING MATERIALS WILL BE THE RESPONSIBILITY OF THE OWNER. AFTER ALL WALL PARTITIONS AND RELATED ITEMS ARE REMOVED BY THE CONTRACTOR, THE OWNER WILL REQUIRE APPROXIMATELY 14 CONSECUTIVEWORKING DAYS TO ABATE THE ACM. AFTER THE ACM IS ABATED, THE C ONTRACTOR WILL BE ALLOWED TO RETURN TO WORK IN THE AREA. NO WORK WILL BE ALLOWED IN THE PROJECT AREA DURING THE ABATEMENT PERIOD BY ANYONE OTHER AN CITY STAFF, ACM ABATEMENT CONTRACTORS, AND CONSULTANTS." 3. Delete NOTE 18 from DEMOLITION PLAN and from DEMOLITION NOTES. SHEET A-103 1. At door 18, change the hollow metal designation from HM-1 to HM-2. 2. At door 17, change the hollow metal designation from HM-2 to HM-3. 3. On plan 1/A-103, in Mechanical 221, change keyed note 10 to 8 and add the following to the Keyed Notes: "8. Seal partition tight to deck above for a 1-hour fire resistive rating. " +� 4. See attached drawing ADl-01 and AD1-02 for additional keyed notes referencing drawings 6/A-103 and 7/A-103. PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 4222 851" Street ■ Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500 """°' Lubbock ElPaso Midland Amarillo i 5. Add the following to the ELEVATION KEYED NOTES: a. "16. One -hour GWB partition, refer to floor plans." b. " 17. One -hour partition beyond, refer to Section 9/A5-01 " C. "18. One -hour partition, refer to Section 9/A-105 d. "19. Existing saw -tooth ceiling beyond." e. "20. Bottom of saw -tooth ceiling meets top of aluminum railing." f. "21. These horizontals shown in section crossing the corridor. " SHEET A-104 1. In corridor 222, change NOTE 7 to NOTE 1. Provide new lay -in ceiling to match existing in this corridor where ductwork above ceiling is shown. SHEET M1 & M2 "^ 1. Refer to the drawings, sheets M1 and M2. In the area south of the equipment room, F ; labeled 'FUTURE FINISH -OUT SPACE (SHELL SPACE)" on sheet M2, note that y ductwork shown to be removed from this area shall not be removed under this phase of the work, but shall be abandoned. Abandon the existing ductwork serving this area from the old multi -zone unit. Remove the ductwork that interferes with the installation of the 60x28 supply and 40 x 28 return air duct with sound trap shown on sheet M2. Note that all ductwork serving the area to be renovated under this phase, and any ductwork interfering with new ductwork to be installed under this phase shall be removed and not abandoned. SHEET E2 Add four (4) exit lights to the second floor lighting plan. These four additional lights shall be located in the area west of the renovated area on this sheet. The exact location of each sign shall be determined by the Electrical Engineer prior to installation. All r necessary devices, wiring and circuitry to be provided and installed by the contractor. CLARIFICATIONS SHEET E3 1. ENSURE conduit from the J-box above ceiling to the door strike plate of each door A" shown to have a J-box above to allow card reader compatible hardware to be installed. Reference NOTE 2 on SHEET E3. 2. On SHEET A-104, on ceiling plan 1/A-104, the 2x2 grid in the upper left-hand corner ^' of the drawing is existing computer flooring located in the Traffic Engineering office. b This is not new ceiling as part of this project. , I END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 n PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 4222 8511 Street • Lubbock, Texas 79423 (806) 473-2200 FAX (806) 473-3500 Lubbock ElPaso Midland Amarillo . f .. . n... . �..... ,.. _-:J i ... t,... .w.-•r- p . .- f.. .�s._ Y' T R ... _.. �'^i 7� _ _. i m.. �—O IAA" $c. E LEVATIC)N -7/-1D3 `�' 15 -01 ,""I ""q A 4 4 /4 - 'ly" .5c EL vA+t'° ON, 9,1 b/A- 1 o3 AP I - 02 13/A-501 CONTRACTOR NOTIFICATION AND ACKNOWLEDGMENT Contractor/Company Name Contractor/Company Representative: (Print) Description of work: � '� '� (�ff --J Municipal Square, located at 916 Texas Avenue. in Lubbock, contains Asbestos Containing Building Materials (ACBM). The description of known materials and locations are listed below. Type / Location: Pipe fitting insulation, mudded joints / Rm. #'s B7, B29, B32 PB102, 110, 114, & MC135 Type / Location: 9 X 9 floor tile & mastic, beige / Rm. #'s B2, 4, 10, 15, 16, 22, 23, 27; 127, 128, 129A-132, 203, 241-245, 248, & 250 Type / Location: 12 X 12 floor tile, white with gray accents / Rm. #'s B 17 Type / Location: 9 X 9 floor tile, white with light & dark accents / Rm. # 132 Type / Location: 9 X 9 floor tile, tan/light green/mastic / Rm. #'s IS 1, & 9-32 Type / Location: Type / Location: Type / Location: In no way should the above be considered a complete and/or exhaustive list of asbestos in this building. Certain materials containing asbestos may be enclosed behind walls and be hidden from view. Any material uncovered during a maintenance project that is suspected of containing asbestos should be reported to the Ci, of ubbock Facilities Management Department, and dealt with according t ate and ral ' be os laws. Only trained and licensed contractors may perform wor tha distur sb s os ntaining materials (ACM). _. 1 �/ S1s?Ilat ,�,�A Date: The signed form must be sent to the Facilities Management Department, and will be added to this facility's Management Plan. BOND CHECK 3EST RATING f t LICENSE IN TEXAS - DATE BY -r-b µ PAYMENT BOND r 661 Bond No. S-900 3516 0 STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021 (a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $26,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that HUNTER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of TWO HUNDRED NINETY SEVEN THOUSAND EIGHT HUNDRED SEVENTY SEVEN AND NO/100 --- Dollars ($ 297,877.00 )lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 13TH day of SEPTEMBER , 2001 , to BID #187-011RS - CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT RENOVATIONS PHASE III -A and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond Is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021 (a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 17TH day of SEPTEMBER Y001 WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY HUNTER CONSTRUCTION COPIPANY Surety Principal *By: By. KEVIN DUNN, Attorney -In -Fact (Title) By: ,. (Title) By: (Title) The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates KEVIN DUNN an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY Surety t, " By: KEVIN DUNN , Attorney -In -Fact Approved as to form: City of Lubbock��l By: 4 ✓Xl�Lf'/ City Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. s •IT iS PROF11B1TF.D TO PHOT000PY THIS DOCUMENT' "• °' '�> ' GROUPNAS SURETY NORTH AMERICAN SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY WASH NGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT North American Specialty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under laws of the State of New Hampshire, and having its principal office in the City of Manchester, New Hampshire, and Washington International insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona and having its principal office in the city of Itasca, Illinois, each does hereby make, constitute and appoint: Kevin Dunn, Cara D. Hancock, Fred Davis, Harold D. Bing eli jointly and / or severally Its true and lawful Attorneys) -in -Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for and on its behalf and as its act and deed, bonds or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalf of each of said Companies, as surety, on contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law, regulation, contract or otherwise, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract or suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the amount of TEN MILLION ($10,000,000,00) DOLLARS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of both North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company at meetings duly called and held on the 20 of March, 2000: 'RESOLVED, that any two of the President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, the Secretary or any Assistant S ecretary be, and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a Power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of surety, and that each or any of them hereby is authorized to attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney and to attach therein the seal of the Company; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with regard to any bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached." IN VPINBSS WHEREOF, North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company have caused their official seats to be hereunto affixed, and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 25 day of DULY 20 00. North American Specialty Insurance Company Washington International Insurance Company ° F? By SEAL ='n" = Daniel G. Gibson ...+ u_ Cora wa,` 5 SEAL o %�'�2,1�.�! Wig• ��.•���:.,��:� 94�r,� �'b� By "'••. 7k o`� U Steven P. Anderson State of Illinois County of Cook ss: OFFICIAL •S"L YASMia.IN A PATEL�� Mort.�r ►ur.�rA'ra os N.ur.ow wr eo�rpoN ioow�euwn�oa " Yasmin A. Patel, Notary Public 25 day of NLY 20 00 , before me, a Notary Public personally appeared and Daniel G. Cn-bson Steven P. Anderson personally know to me, who being by me duly sworn, acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of their respective companies. I, *Robert 1. Cate , the duly elected Assistant Secretary ofNorth American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attorney given by said North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, which is still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Companies this 17 th day of September 20 01 Robert I. Cate GGp CHECK 144+ BF',;T RATING ,. MENS D 1N TEXAS DATE 9 2► ©� BY PERFORMANCE BOND 0" Bond No. S-900 3516 0" STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021 (a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that HUNTER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY (hereinafter called the Surety(s), as Surety(s), are held and firmly bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of TWO HUNDRED NINETY SEVEN THOUSAND EIGHT HUNDRED SEVENTY SEVEN AND NO/100 ---- Dollars ($297,877.00 ) lawful money of the United States for the payment whereof, the said Principal and Surety bind .�. themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 13TH day of SEPTEMBER , 2001 , to BID #187-01/RS - CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT RENOVATIONS p•, PHASE III -A A" and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent .� as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021 (a) of the ^�^ Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this'17THJ day of SEPTEMBER , 4001 WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY HU R CONST CTI C PANY Surety Pr' ci I By: � g KEVIN DUNN , Attorney -In -Fact (Title) y: (Title) By: (Title) 0" The undersigned surety company represents that it Is duly qualified to do business In Texas, and hereby designates KEVIN DUNN an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. WASHINGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY Surety . By: KEVIN DUNN, Attorney -In -Fact Approved as to Form City of Lubbock ®� City Attorney * Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. E:J 7T IS PRO111BITFD TO PHOTOCOPY THIS DOCUMFNT - P, r NAS SURETY GROUP NORTH AMERICAN SPECIALTY INSURANCE COMPANY ,WASH7NGTON INTERNATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY a" GENERAL POWER OF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, THAT North American Specialty Insurance Company, a corporation duly organized and existing under laws of the State of New Hampshire, and having its principal office in the City of Manchester, New Hampshire, and Washington International Insurance Company, a corporation organized and existing under the laws of the State of Arizona and having its principal office in the city of Itasca, Illinois, each does hereby make, constitute and appoint: Kevin Dunn, Cara D: Hancock, Fred Davis, Harold D. Binggeli jointly and / or severally Aw Its true and lawful Attomey(s)-in-Fact, to make, execute, seal and deliver, for and on its behalf and as its act and deed, bonds or other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond on behalf of each of said Companies, as surety, on contracts of suretyship as are or may be required or permitted by law, regulation, contract or otherwise, provided that no bond or undertaking or contract or suretyship executed under this authority shall exceed the amount of TEN MILLION ( $10,000,000.00) DOLLARS This Power of Attorney is granted and is signed by facsimile under and by the authority of the following Resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of both North American. Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company at meetings duly called and held on the 20 of March, 2000: "RESOLVED, that any two of the President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, the Secretary or any Assistant Secretary be, and each or any of them hereby is authorized to execute a Power of Attorney qualifying the attorney named in the given Power a" of Attorney to execute on behalf of the Company bonds, undertakings and all contracts of surety, and that each or any of them hereby is authorized to attest to the execution of any such Power of Attorney and to attach therein the seal of the Company, and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of such officers and the seal of the Company may be affixed to any such Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto by facsimile, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signatures or facsimile seal shall be binding upon the Company when so affixed and in the future with regard to any bond, undertaking or contract of surety to which it is attached." IN WITNESS WHEREOF, North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company have caused their official seals to be hereunto affixed, and these presents to be signed by their authorized officers this 25 day of JULY 20 00. North American Specialty Insurance Company Washington International Insurance Company B SEAL I� ���= Daniel G. Gibson A c z !1RlZONA �`• � By . -�'� Steven P. Anderson '�nm* nay` State of Illinois County of Cook ss: ..e QFFIClAL .S�4L MY OYMM �pN�AE70'np � ��,oZ . Yasmin A. Patel, Notary Public am 25 day of JiJI Y 20 00. , before me, a Notary Public personally appeared and Daniel G. Gibson Steven P. Anderson personally know to me, who being by me duly sworn, acknowledged that they signed the above Power of Attorney as officers of and acknowledged said instrument to be the voluntary act and deed of their respective companies. I, Robert I. Cate , the duly elected. Assistant Secretary ofNorth American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of a Power of Attomey given by said North American Specialty Insurance Company and Washington International Insurance Company, which is still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have set my hand and affixed the seals of the Companies this L th day of September 20 01 Robert I. Cate 0 W IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint: You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of.lnsurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX # (512)475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim you should contact the agent or the company first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. V" ....CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE r a r a ow 0. W ow- 0- ewe+ ACORQM CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE IMM1DD/YY) 09/17/2001 PRODUCER (915) 570-3456 FAX (915) 570-3450 Gallagher Invest 1110 N . Mari enfel d St. Suite 330 Midland, TX 79701 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE INSURED Hunter Construction Company P.o. BOX 2587 Lubbock, TX 79408 INSURER A: Mid -Continent INSURERB: Fireman's Fund Co. Mutual(Myron INSURERC General Star Indermi (]arret) INSURER0: Texas Work Comp. Fund INSURER E: Fi remans Fund (McGee) COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. .NSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE POLICY EXPIRATION DATE D LANITS GENERAL LIABILITY D4GL51694 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ 100,000 M X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CLAIMS MADE a OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5 , 00 PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ 1,000,0001, IA GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000i GEN'L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS - COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000,000 POLICY PER0. LOC AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY ANY AUTO BA6400396 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) S 1,000,000 X BODILY INJURY (Per person) $ B ALL OWNED AUTOS SCHEDULED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS NON -OWNED AUTOS X BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY- EA ACCIDENT $ OTHER THAN EA ACC AUTO ONLY: AGG $ LlANY AUTO $ EXCESS LIABILITY IXG376037 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1, 000, 00 OCCUR ❑ CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE S C $ $ DEDUCTIBLE $ RETENTION $ D WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY TSF426616 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 1 TORY LIMITS ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE- EA EMPLOYE $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE -POLICY LIMIT 1 $ 1,000,000 OTy ui irders' Risk X197700341 03/31/2001 03/31/2002 $2,000,000 Per ]obsite E 1,000 Deductible DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS/LOCATIONS/VEHICL€SIEXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENTISPECWL PROVISIONS roject: City of Lubbock Policy Department Renovations Phase III -A %dditional Insured & Waiver of Subrogation included on General Liability & Auto policies in favor of ertificate holder as required by written contract. Waiver of Subrogatoin included on Work Comp. licy in favor of certificate holder as required by written contract. CERTIFICATE HOLDER I I ADDITIONAL INSURED: INSURER LETTER: CANCELLATION SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, City of Lubbock BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY PO BOX 2000 OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, MAGENTWR REPRESENTATIVES. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE Lubbock, TX 79457 Ron Stroman, CIC AGUKUY5-5(71'J7) FAX: (806)775-2164 - vwcURUt;UKVUKAIIVNTssu 9 IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s)- If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend, extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon_ P- ACORD 25S (7l97) AM CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE TO: CITY OF LUBBOCK DATE: P.O. BOX 2000 �- LUBBOCK, TX 79457 TYPE OF PROJECT: & THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT (Name and Address of Insured) is, at the date of this certificate, insured by this Company with respect to the business operations hereinafter described, for the typed of insurance and in accordance with the provisions of the standard policies used by this company, the further hereinafter described. Exceptions to standard policy noted hereon. TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER EFFECTIVE EFFECTIVE LIMITS DATE DATE GENERAL LIABILITY ❑ Commercial General Liability General Aggregate $ 11 Claims Made Products-Comp/Op AGG $ ❑ Occurrence Personal & Adv. Injury $ ❑ Owner's & Contractors Protectiv Each Occurrence $ Fire Damage (Any one Fire) Med Exp (Any one Person) AUTOMOTIVE LIABILITY ❑ Any Auto Combined Single Limit $ ❑ All Owned Autos Bodily Injury (Per Person) $ ❑ Scheduled Autos Bodily Injury (Per Accident) ❑ Hired Autos Property Damage $ ❑ Non -Owned Autos GARAGE LIABILITY ❑ Any Auto Auto Only - Each Accident $ ❑ Other than Auto Only: Each Accident $ Aggregate $ ❑ BUILDER'S RISK ❑ 100% of the Total Contract Price $ ❑ INSTALLATION FLOATER $ EXCESS LIABILITY ❑ Umbrella Form Each Occurrence $ Aggregate $ ❑ Other Than Umbrella Form $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY The Proprietor/ ❑ Included Statutory Limits Partners/Executive ❑ Excluded Each Accident $ Officers are: Disease Policy Limit $ Disease -Each Employee $ OTHER The above policies either in the body thereof or by appropriate endorsement provide that they may not be changed or canceled by the. insurer in less than the legal time required after the insured has received written notice of such change or cancellation, or In case there is no legal requirement, in less than five days in advance of cancellation. FIVE COPIES OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE " (Name of Insurer) MUST BE SENT TO THE CITY OF LUBBOCK �., By: F Title: CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST A CONTRACTOR SHALL: (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19-point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: 2 5@ REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee" "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule, (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. -. 3 r. t: r•^ u.. r, r-- w CONTRACT off*, CONTRACT STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 1311 day of September, 2001 by and between the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Hunter Construction Company of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. PW WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #187-01/RS - CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE DEPARTMENT RENOVATIONS PHASE III -A - $297.877.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract 7' documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. - The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. ATTEST: Sedretary Q '*d AP ED AST CINNT: Owner's R presentative i IAi APPROVED AS TO FORM: Ci y Attorney ATTEST: C orate Secretary, 1 CITY O OGK TEXAS O ) By: M TITLE:- T�� % g E",ti COMPLETE ADDRESS: Hunter Construction Company P.O. Box 2587 Lubbock, Texas 79408 GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City c! Lubbock, Texas. 2. CONTRACTOR Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit HUNTER CONSTRUCTION COMPANY who has agreed to perform the work embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE ,., Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative GARY SMITH A.I.A. FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or ' inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the A Contractor or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the"contract" or "contract documents". " 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 6. SUBCONTRACTOR *�* The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated Ago" by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it.is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the parry who gives the notice. 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES ** Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and.pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence,. labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless 1 otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. -� 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to ensure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) W calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION F It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall r-, furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or &' inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any r and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions -� given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS -- The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. '.." 3 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation that may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 4 r-+ 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS r The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 0" 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for �.. the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing,`before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall r " be included in the "actual field cost." .-* 5 No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before the commencement of any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative before bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of -T bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 27. PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the -- subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. 28. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. *-- All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City of Lubbock as an additional insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. A. General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's and Contractor's Protective Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $300,000.00 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000.00 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and non -owned cars including: Employers Non -ownership Liability Hired and Non -owned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job r and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance. The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 0% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $1,000,000.00 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00. -- 1. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement (TWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and r (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of .-� coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current -- certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: FM (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance 9 Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; 10 (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage;" and (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the - - Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and 11 (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. 12 0 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this ,., contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $0 (ZERO) PER DAY, not as a �., penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. �., 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that �"'t 13 when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and 14 employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial -* payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be r-- retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's _.,.Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's Representative. 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the 16 written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be r. delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the ,.., contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, N., shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, h. and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to """ 17 the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies that remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The Contractor is required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the Contractor is required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus 18 materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 19 CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS M RE: RESOLUTION NO. 6262, ITEM NO. 39, APRIL 8, 1999 r, EXHIBIT A City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Hourly Rate Acoustical Ceiling Installer 11.50 Air Conditioner Installer 12.50 Air Conditioner Installer -Helper 6.25 Asbestos Worker 9.00 Asbestos Supervisor 12.50 Bricklayer 12.50 Bricklayer -Helper 7.00 Carpenter 11.00 Carpenter -Helper 7.00 Cement Finisher 8.00 Drywall Hanger 11.00 Electrician 13.75 Electrician -Helper 7.00 Equipment Operator -Heavy 9.50 Equipment Operator -Light 8.50 Floor Installer 9.50 Glazier 10.50 Insulator-Piping/Boiler 11.50 Insulator -Helper 7.00 Iron Worker 11.00 Laborer-Generai 6.00 Mortar Mixer 6.00 Painter 9.50 Plumber 12.50 Plumber -Helper 7.00 Roofer 9.00 Roofer -Helper 7.00 Sheet Metal Worker 10.00 Sheet Metal Worker -Helper 7.00 Welder -Certified 11.00 H EXHIBIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Hourly Rate Asphalt Heaterman 9.00 Asphalt Shoveler 6.00 Concrete Finisher 8.00 Concrete Finisher -Helper 7.00 Electrician 12.00 Flagger 6.00 Form Setter 7.00 Form Setter -Helper 6.25 Laborer -General 6.00 Laborer -Utility 6.75 Mechanic 8.00 Mechanic -Helper 7.00 Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine 7.75 Bulldozer 8.00 Concrete Paving Machine 7.75 Front End Loader 7.25 Heavy Equipment Operator 8.00 Light Equipment Operator 7.25 Motor Grader Operator 9.50 Roller 6.75 Scraper 7.25 Tractor 7.25 Truck Driver -Light 6.50 Truck Driver -Heavy 7.00 irk EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT D Prevailing Wage Rates Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be as required by the fair Labor Standards Act. 3 SPECIFICATIONS CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE SQUARE RENOVATION PHASE III - A CAPITAL PROJECT #9616 JUNE 2001 p Parkhill, Smith &Cooper, Inc. .................. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners DIVISIONS 1 THROUGH 14 FANNING, FANNING & ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEERS 2555 74th STREET LUBBOCK, TEXAS 79423 (806) 745-2533 DIVISIONS 15 AND 16 PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER ENGINEERS ■ ARCHITECTS ■ PLANNERS LUBBOCK, TEXAS J'jQ TABLE OF CONTENTS 14746 D+ TE OF �E DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (o . Z, 7-O 1 RAM SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK......................................................................2 SECTION 01019 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS........................................................2 SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS................................................................8 SECTION 01300 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS....................................................5 SECTION 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS..........................................4 SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS............................................................... 3 SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS.................................................................2 SECTION 01700 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS............................................................3 DIVISION 2 SITE WORK SECTION 02072 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING.............................................3 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE NOT USED DIVISION 4 MASONRY NOT USED DIVISION 5 METAL SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS ....................... ...............3 DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS SECTION 06114 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING ..................................................... 3 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK......................................................................6 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION....................................................................2 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS..............................................................................6 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08000 DOOR SCHEDULE............................................................................ 3 SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES............................................................4 SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS.....................................................................4 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE....................................................................................7 SECTION 08800 GLAZING........................................................................................4 03879200 06/01 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 1 PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER ENGINEERS ■ ARCHITECTS ■ PLANNERS LUBBOCK, TEXAS DIVISION 9 FINISHES SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS..............................................................6 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS....................................................................4 SECTION 09680 CARPETING....................................................................................4 SECTION 09900 PAINTING....................................................................................... 9 SECTION 09915 COLOR, FINISH AND DOOR SCHEDULES............................................4 DIVISION 10 SPECIALTIES SECTION 10260 WALL GUARDS, HANDRAILS AND CORNER GUARDS .......................... 3 -► SECTION 10522 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES .........................3 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT M NOT USED DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS NOT USED r+� DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION NOT USED DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS NOT USED r' x 'P 14746 Q� of 03879200 TABLE OF CONTENTS PAGE 2 ,; 06/01 Re MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ,. SPECIFICATON INDEX FOR THE POLICE SQUARE PHASE III -A ADMINISTRATION CITY OF LUBBOCK LUBBOCK, TEXAS 15000 General Provisions for Mechanical and Electrical ,•., 15300 Piping and Accessories 15310 Plumbing Systems 15330 Chilled and Heating Water Systems is 15390 Marking and Identification - 15400 Air Distribution 15500 Hangers and Supports 15600 Insulation 15700 Equipment 15800 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing Mechanical Systems ` 15900 Temperature Regulation w/Point Chart 16010 16110 16120 16130 16140 16170 "* 16195 16441 16470 16510 Basic Electrical Requirements Raceways Wires and Cables Boxes Wiring Devices Grounding and Bonding Electrical Identification Safety Switches Panelboards Lighting 9COTT 'M. FANNING .,,.. 61441• �w li OF e � � `. .. .... .......... .*.. ZHN A. FANNING y�..........�................... 34307 f•, pn'• fir._ —4:O L4 0 , SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK rd, PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. >> 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Work covered by Contract Documents. r B. Work by Owner. C. Owner furnished products. D. Contractor use of site. E. Future work. F. Work Sequence. G. Owner occupancy. 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Location: 916 Texas Avenue, Lubbock, Texas. B. Verbal Summary: Without force or effect on requirements of the Contract Documents a brief description of the Project is as follows: The renovation of the second floor of the southeast half of the block for the relocation of Police Administration. 1.4 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner will award contracts which will commence at an undetermined time after the start of construction on this project. Work under these contracts will include: 1. Telephone System: The Owner will contract for furnishing and installing of a telephone network system. 2. Installation of computer cabling. B. Items noted 'NIC' (Not in Contract), will be furnished and installed by Owner as required to meet the occupancy schedule. 1.5 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS ►-. A. Products furnished to the site and paid for by Owner: 1. Residential appliances not scheduled nor specified to be furnished as part of this project. loft 2. Electronic equipment: copiers, shredders, other. B. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor. °^ 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. q.: 03879200 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1 06/01 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections and service. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage, jointly -� with Owner. 3. Handle, store, install and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. 1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE A. Limit use of site to allow: 1. Work by Others and Work by Owner. B. Construction Operations: Limited to areas indicated on drawings to be constructed. C. The facility will be occupied by the Owner throughout construction. -- 1.7 WORK SEQUENCE A. During the construction period, coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner and Architect: Normal hours of operation are 8:00 am to 5:00 pm, Monday through Friday. However, there is staff in the facility 24 hours/day, 7 days/week. A 24 hour notice to Owner must be given prior to working before or after normal hours of operation. Contractor will not be given key to facility. 1.8 OWNER OCCUPANCY =a A. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations. B. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement. PART 2 - PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - PART EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879200 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2 06/01 — -CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS _PART1_-GENERAL , 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions ofthe Agreement and Division 1 'Genero| Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES . , .�. A. Schedule ofValues. B. Application for Payment. C. Change Procedures. D. Measurement and payment 'unit prices. E. Alternates. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 013OO-Submittals: Schedule ofValues. _ B. Section O1GOO-Material and Equipment: Product substitutions. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 - Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. - B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. C. Format: Utilize the Table mfContents ofthis Specification. Identify each line item with number and title ofthe major specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds and insurance. 'D. Include within each line item, o directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. E. Revise schedule tolist approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit three copies ofeoch application on AIA Form G702 'App|icaton and Certificate for Payment and A|AG7O3'Continuation Sheet. B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule ofValues for listing items inApplication for Payment. C. Payment Period: As defined in Owner -Contractor agreement. D. Include one copy of waiver ofliens from each subcontractor. 1.6 CHANGE PROCEDURES - A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract 8urn/Phomor Contract Time aadescribed in the General Conditions ofthe Agreement. By issuing Architect's Supplemental Instruction form. 03878200 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 0G/O1 B. The Architect may issue a Construction Change Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications and a change in Contract Time for executing the change. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within 7 days. C. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting request for change to the Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600. D. Cost Determination: As defined in Article 24 - EXTRA WORK of the General Conditions of the Agreement. E. Change Order Forms: to be provided by City. F. Execution of Change Orders: Owner will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. 1.7 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - UNIT PRICES A. Authority: Measurement methods are delineated in the individual specification sections. B. Take measurements and compute quantities. The Architect will verify measurements and quantities. C. Unit Quantities: quantities and measurements indicated in the Bid Form are for contract purposes only. Actual quantities provided will determine payment. D. Payment Includes: Full compensation for required labor, Products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit. E. Defect Assessment: Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. F. Unit Price Schedule: As indicated in the Bid Submittal. 1.8 ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner -Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required. C. Schedule of Alternates - None. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879200 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01019 - 2 06/01 ,A SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance. ,» B. Schedule of references. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE �!a k 4A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents. C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. �,►, D. The contractual relationship duties and responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Architect shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference - otherwise in any reference document. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES a; AA Aluminum Association 818 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1000 Vermont Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ACI American Concrete Institute Box 19150 Reford Station Detroit, MI 48219 ADC Air Diffusion Council 230 North Michigan Avenue Chicago, IL 60601 03879200 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 1 All 06/01 AGA American Gas Association 1515 Wilson Blvd. Arlington, VA 22209 AGC Associated General Contractors of America 1957 E Street, N.W. _. Washington, DC 20006 Al Asphalt Institute Asphalt Institute Building College Park, MD 20740 AIA American Institute of Architects — 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611 �. AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 1000 16th Street, N.W. — Washington, DC 20036 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 APA American Plywood Association Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 ARI Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 1501 Wilson Boulevard r Arlington, VA 22209 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle, N.E. Atlanta, GA 30329 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers 15233 Ventura Blvd., Suite 811 Sherman Oaks, CA 91403 03879200 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 2 06/01 ^" -, ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 2310S hW I R AM' �.... out a ter ee nve Arlington, VA 22206 AWPA American Wood -Preservers' Association 3246 Fall Creek Highway, Suite 1900 Grandbury, TX 76049-7979 AWS American Welding Society 550 LeJeune Road, N.W. Miami, FL 33135 AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 y ; BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturer Association 60 East 42nd Street, Room 611 New York, NY 10165 BIA Brick Institute of America 11490 Commerce Park Drive Reston, VA 22091 CDA Copper Development Association 1 57th Floor, Chrysler Building 405 Lexington Avenue New York, NY 10174 CFR Code of Federal Regulations North Capitol Street between G & H Streets, NW Washington, DC 20402 CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute 1101 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission 1111 Eighteenth Street, NW Washington, DC 20207 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60195 DHI Door and Hardware Institute 7711 Old Springhouse Road McLean, VA 22102 03879200 REFERENCE STANDARDS -+ 06/01 01090 - 3 DOT Department of Transportation 400 Seventh Street, SW Washington, DC 20590 EJCDC Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee American Consulting Engineers Council 1015 15th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 25 North Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 EPA Environmental Protection Agency 401 M Street, SW Washington, DC 20460 FCC Federal Communications Commission 1919 M Street, NW Washington, DC 20554 FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association 3310 Harrison White Lakes Professional Building Topeka, KS 66611 FM Factory Mutual System 1 151 Boston -Providence Turnpike P.O. Box 688 Norwood, MA 02062 FS Federal Specification General Services Administration Specifications and Consumer Information Distribution Section (WFSIS) Washington Navy Yard, Bldg. 197 Washington, DC 20407 GA Gypsum Association 810 First St. NE, Suite 510 Washington, DC 20002 HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association 1825 Michael Faraday Drive P.O. Box 2789 HPW H.P. White Laboratory 3114 Scarboro Road Street, MD 21154 Reston, VA 22090-2789 03879200 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 4 06/01 ICBO International Conference of Building Officials 5360 S. Workman Mill Road ^" Whittier, CA 90601 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers �. 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 IES Illumination Engineering Society of North America 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 IMIAC International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council International Masonry Institute 815 15th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 ISWA Insect Screen Weavers Association P.O. Box 1018 Ossining NY 10562 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association 1300 Sumner Avenue Cleveland, OH 44115-2851 a MIL Military Specification ` Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue Philadelphia, PA 19120 s . ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association 221 North LaSalle Street A Chicago, IL 60601 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers �. 221 North LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60601 NBS National Bureau of Standards (U.S. Department of Commerce) Gaithersburg, MD 20234 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association P.O. Box 781 Herndon, VA 22070 NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau 8224 Old Courthouse Road Vienna, VA 22180 NEC National Electrical Code (by NFPA) 03879200 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 5 '°'^ 06/01 NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 7315 Wisconsin Avenue Bethesda, MD 20814 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 2101 'L' Street, N.W. — Washington, DC 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Battery March Park Quincy, MA 02269 NFoPA National Forest Products Association 1619 Massachusetts Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association P.O. Box 34518 Memphis, TN 38135 NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association 8600 Bryn Mawr Avenue Chicago, IL 60631 NSF National Sanitation Foundation 3475 Plymouth Road -- P.O. Box 1468 Ann Arbor, MI 47106 NWWDA National Wood Window & Door Manufacturers Association 205 W. Touhy Avenue Park Ridge, IL 60068 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) Government Printing Office a Washington, D.C. 20402 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077 PS Product Standard U. S. Department of Commerce Washington, DC 20203 RIS Redwood Inspection Service One Lombard Street San Francisco, CA 94111 03879200 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 6 06/01 r-e RMA Rubber Manufacturer's Association 1400 K Street, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20005 SDI Steel Deck Institute P.O. Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 S.D.I. Steel Door Institute 712 Lakewood Center North 14600 Detroit Avenue Cleveland, OH 44107 SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council Route 11, Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045 SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 111 East Wacker Drive Chicago, IL 60601 SJI Steel Joist Institute 1205 48th Avenue North, Suite A Myrtle Beach, SC 29577 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 8224 Old Court House Road Vienna, VA 22180 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 4709 Scenic Highway Pensacola, FL 32504-9094 SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213 -TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. Box 326 Princeton, NJ 08540 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 6980 S.W. Varns Road Box 23145 Portland, OR 97223 03879200 REFERENCE STANDARDS 06/01 01090 - 7 WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 8361 A Greensboro Drive McLean, VA 22102 WWPA Western Wood Products Association 1500 Yeon Building Portland, OR 97204 W.W.P.A. Woven Wire Products Association 2515 N. Nordica Avenue Chicago, IL 60635 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879200 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 8 06/01 SECTION 01300 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1.2 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. B. Field engineering. C. Preconstruction meeting. D. Site mobilization meeting. E. Progress meetings. F. Preinstallation meetings. G. Cutting and patching. H. Alteration project procedures. 3 COORDINATION A. B. C. D. E. F G Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of the Project Manual to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. Large Apparatus: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be' installed in any space in the building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. Items which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. 03879200 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 1 r- 06/01 H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. The Owner will schedule a meeting after Notice to Proceed. B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect, Contractor and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda — set by Owner: 1. Submission of executed bonds and insurance certificates. 2. Distribution of Contract Documents. 3. Submission of list of Subcontractors, list of products, Schedule of Values, and progress schedule. 4. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract and the Architect. 5. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures. 6. Scheduling. a. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. b. Owner's requirements. C. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. d. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. e. Survey and building layout. f. Security and housekeeping procedures. g. Schedules. h. Procedures for testing. i. Procedures for maintaining record documents. _ j. Requirements for start-up of equipment. k. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 1.5 SITE MOBILIZATION MEETING A. Architect may schedule a meeting at the Project site prior to Contractor occupancy. " B. Attendance Required: Architect, Special Consultants, Contractor, Contractor's Superintendent, and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. 2. Owner's requirements. 3. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. 4. Temporary utilities provided by Owner. 5. Survey and building layout. 6. Security and housekeeping procedures. 7. Schedules. 8. Procedures for testing. 9. Procedures for maintaining record documents. 10. Requirements for start-up of equipment. 1 1 . Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. 03879200 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 2 06/01 'r= rM D. Remove, cut, and patch work in a manner to minimize damage and to provide a means of restoring products and finishes to original condition unless otherwise specified. E. Refinish visible existing surfaces to remain in renovated rooms and spaces, to specified condition for each material, with a neat transition to adjacent finishes. F. Where new work abuts or aligns with existing, perform a smooth and even transition. Patched work to match existing adjacent work in texture and appearance. G. When finished surfaces are cut so that a smooth transition with new work is not possible, terminate existing surface along a straight line at a natural line of division and submit recommendation to Architect for review. H. Where a change of plane of 1 /4 inch or more occurs, submit recommendation for providing a smooth transition for Architect review. I. Patch or replace portions of existing surfaces which are damaged, lifted, discolored, or showing other imperfections. J. Finish surfaces as specified in individual product Sections. END OF SECTION 03879200 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 5 06/01 No Text SECTION 01500 r`^ TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, and water control. C. Construction Facilities: Access roads, Parking, progress cleaning, project signage, and temporary buildings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Execution Requirements: Contract Closeout; final cleaning. 1.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY ,,. A. Connect to existing power service. Power consumption shall not disrupt Owner's need for continuous service. B. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. C. Power Service Characteristics: As indicated on drawings. D. Provide power outlets for construction operations, with branch wiring and distribution boxes -+ as required. Provide flexible power cords as required. E. Provide main service disconnect and overcurrent protection at convenient location in conformance with National Electric Code. F. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. G. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting. 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets, single phase circuits for power tools for every 2000 sq ft of active work area and at specific locations as required. 2. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting. 1.5 TEMPORARY LIGHTING - A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watts/sq ft. B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes. D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. 03879200 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 1 r^ 06/01 E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. 1.6 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide and pay for heat devices as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations until new heating system is installed. B. Utilize Owner's existing heat plant, extend and supplement with temporary heat devices as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. C. Owner will pay cost of energy used. Exercise measures to conserve energy. D. Enclose building prior to activating temporary heat in accordance with Article 1.14 - Exterior Enclosure, in this Section. E. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed parts. F. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. 1.7 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. B. Provide temporary fan units as required to maintain clean air for construction operations. 1.8 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.9 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Existing designated facilities may be used during construction operations. Maintain daily in clean and sanitary condition. B. At end of construction, return facilities to same or better condition than originally found. 1.10 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas, to allow for Owner's use of site, and to protect existing facilities and adjacent properties from damage from construction operations and demolition. B. Provide barricades and covered walkways required by governing authorities for public rights -of - way and for public access to existing building. C. Provide protection for plant life designated to remain. Replace damaged plant life. D. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 1.11 FENCING A. Construction: At Contractor's option, commercial grade chain link fence or solid wood fence, painted. B. Provide 6 foot high fence around construction site; equip with vehicular and pedestrian gates with locks. 03879200 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 2 06/01 0 c a 1.12 EXTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary insulated weather -tight closure of exterior openings to accommodate acceptable working conditions and protection for Products, to allow for temporary heating and maintenance of required ambient temperatures identified in individual specification Sections, and to prevent entry of unauthorized persons. Provide access doors with self -closing hardware and locks. 1.13 INTERIOR ENCLOSURES A. Provide temporary partitions and ceilings as required to separate work areas from Owner occupied areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into Owner occupied areas, and to prevent damage to existing materials and equipment. B. Construction: Framing and reinforced polyethylene plywood sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at intersections with existing surfaces; insulate to R-11 with maximum Flame Spread rating of 75 in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.14 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. if traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.15 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work, and existing facilities from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. B. Coordinate with Owner's security program. 1.16 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and dispose off -site at intervals as required to maintain clean site. 1.17 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. B. Restore existing facilities used during construction to original condition. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. 03879200 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 3 06/01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS -� Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used '- END OF SECTION 03879200 TEMPORARY FACILITIES & CONTROLS 01500 - 4 06/01 SECTION 01600 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling. C. Product options. D. Substitutions. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Instructions to Bidders: Product options and substitution procedures. B. Section 01400 - Quality Requirements: Product quality monitoring. 1.4 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work and does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Do not use materials and equipment removed from existing premises, except as specifically permitted by the Contract Documents. C. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. D. Materials required to match existing work and not otherwise specified, shall be equal to the existing work in quality, color and finish. Workmanship and installation shall be comparable to adjacent existing work. The Owner shall be the authority in determination of acceptable work. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery 1. Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. 3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 4. Arrange deliveries in accord with the construction schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation to avoid unnecessary delays in the construction process. 03879200 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 1 •^ 06/01 B. Storage 1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 2. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures. 3. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. 4. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Products. 5. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. 6. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 7. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 8. Materials, products and equipment may be stored off site in a bonded and insured warehouse approved by the Architect and Owner. Pay all costs incurred for off -site storage facilities. Products properly stored in off -site storage facilities may be included in progress pay requests with written approval of the Architect. C. Handling 1. Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by manufacturer or specified to protect from damage during storage and installation. 1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. B. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. C. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. D. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product. 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner and Architect for review or redesign services associated with re - approval by authorities. E. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require revision to the Contract Documents. 03879200 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 2 06/01 F. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit four copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used r- PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION 03879200 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01600 - 3 �06/01 r SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 -GENERAL - 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturers field reports. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials. C. Division 15 - Testing Adjusting and Balancing. 1.4 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those �-+ required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative and Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section [014001 [014101 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. +-, 1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection. r� B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other - season. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed -upon times, at equipment location. 03879200 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 1 06/01 E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879200 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 2 06/01 0- SECTION 01700 .-- EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Adjusting. D. Project record documents. E. Operation and maintenance data. F. Warranties. G. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities and Controls: Progress cleaning. B. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: System start-up, testing, adjusting, and balancing. s-, 1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.5 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. a•• C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. D. Replace filters of operating equipment. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. H. Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes. I. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if air conditioning units were operated during construction. 1.6 ADJUSTING A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 03879200 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 1 r-s 06/01 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 6. Changes made by addenda and modification. F. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit one copy 15 days prior to final inspection, 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, bound in three D ring binders with durable plastic covers. B. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. C. Submit two final volumes revised within ten days after final inspection. D. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. E. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. F. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, type on 24 pound white paper. G. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. H. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1. Significant design criteria. 2. List of equipment. 3. Parts list for each component. 4. Operating instructions necessary for Owner to make full and efficient use of equipment including recommended maintenance and seasonal change -over procedures for HVAC systems. 03879200 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700 - 2 06/01 �" r- 5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 6. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. I. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: 1. Shop drawings and product data. 2. Air and water balance reports. 3. Certificates. 4. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. 1.9 WARRANTIES A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble with metal prong binder in durable plastic presentation cover. D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.10 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections. B. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 - EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION 03879200 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 06/01 01700 - 3 N SECTION 02072 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Construction of temporary barriers. B. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures. C. Removal of designated construction. D. Disposal of materials. Storage of removed materials. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Owner's continued occupancy. B. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings. C. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: dust control barricades, security at Owner occupied areas, and cleanup during construction. D. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, subsurface obstructions, and other appurtenances that differ from locations on plans. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical disconnection and re -connection. B. Obtain required permits from authorities. C. Do not close or obstruct egress width to any building or site exit. D. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 5 days prior written notice to Owner. E. Conform to procedures applicable when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed. 03879200 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 1 -, 06/01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers. B. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit continued Owner occupancy. C. Protect existing materials and equipment which are not to be demolished. D. Provide protective covers over existing vinyl composition including floor finish in elevator. E. Provide elevator manufacturer's standard protective padding on elevator walls. F. Provide temporary protective corner protection at all outside corners along route for removal of refuse. G. Do not store nor pile demolition materials nor equipment on any part of the structure in a manner that would cause permanent damage. H. Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring. I. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. J. Mark location and termination of utilities. Provide bypass connections as necessary to maintain continuity of service to occupied areas of building. Provide minimum of 72 hours advance notice to Contracting Officer if shutdown of service is necessary during changeover. K. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress. L. Set refuse containers at location approved by Owner. 3.2 DEMOLITION A. Disconnect remove, cap, and identify designated utilities within demolition areas. B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members. C. Flame Cutting: Do not use cutting torches for removal until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as interior of ducts and pipe spaces, verify condition of hidden space before starting flame -cutting operations. Maintain portable fire suppression devices during flame -cutting operations. D. Maintain fire protection services during demolition operations. E. Remove temporary Work. F. Demolish plaster in small sections. Cut plaster at junctures with construction to remain using power -driven masonry saw or hand tools; do not use power -driven impact tools. 1 . Locate demolition equipment throughout structure and promptly remove debris to avoid imposing excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing. 2. Provide services for effective air and water pollution controls as required by local authorities having jurisdiction. G. If unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure both nature and extent of the conflict. Submit report to Contracting Officer in written, accurate detail. Pending receipt of directive from Contracting Officer, rearrange demolition schedule as necessary to continue overall job progress without undue delay. H. If hazardous materials are encountered during demolition operations, comply with applicable regulations, laws, and ordinances concerning removal, handling, and protection against exposure or environmental pollution. 03879200 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 2 06/01 3.3 DISPOSAL A. Coordinate route for movement of refuse within the existing building with the Owner to create the least amount of interference with Owner's continuing occupancy and operations. B. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn or bury materials on site. C. Storage or sale of removed items on site will not be permitted. D. Remove materials as Work progresses. 3.4 CLEANUP A. Repair damaged pavement or landscaping under refuse containers and return to original condition. B. Repair existing finishes to remain, which are damaged during demolition, to match adjacent finishes. C. Upon completion of demolition work, remove tools, equipment, and demolished materials from site. D. Remove protections and leave interior areas broom clean. E. Repair demolition performed in excess of that required. Return elements of construction and surfaces to remain to condition existing prior to start operations. F. Repair adjacent construction or surfaces soiled or damaged by demolition work. END OF SECTION 03879200 06/01 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 3 t,- SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Aluminum tube decorative element and fittings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support of accessories. '^ B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Placement of anchors in stud wall construction. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Field preparation and paint finish. �• 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Design decorative element work to resist loading requirements in accordance with ASTM E985. 1.5 REFERENCES A. AA DAF-45 - Designation System for Aluminum Finishes. B. AAMA 603.8 - Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Pigmented Organic Coatings on Extruded Aluminum. C. AAMA 605.2 - Specification for High Performance Organic Coatings on Architectural Extrusions and Panels. D. AAMA 606.1 - Specifications and Inspection Methods for Integral Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. E. AAMA 607.1 - Specifications and Inspection 'Methods for Clear Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. F. AAMA 608.1 - Specification and Inspection Methods for Electrolytically Deposited Color Anodic Finishes for Architectural Aluminum. G. ASTM B209 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Sheet and Plate. H. ASTM B210 - Aluminum -Alloy Drawn Seamless Tubes. I. ASTM B221 - Aluminum and Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. ..b J. ASTM B241 - Aluminum -Alloy Seamless Pipe and Seamless Extruded Tube. K. ASTM E985 - Performance of Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings. L. ASTM E985 - Permanent Metal Railing Systems and Rails for Buildings. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Indicate profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. 2. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. 03879200 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 1 -- 06/01 3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS A2.0 welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. 4. Indicate adjacent construction and required anchorages to be provided by other sections. B. Samples 1. Submit one, 4 inch long sample of decorative element. Submit one sample, of tee wall bracket ceiling anchor. 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings and as instructed by manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Railing Accessories 1. Julius Blum & Co., Carlstadt, NJ. 2. J.G. Brown, Skokie, IL. 3. Blumcraft, Pittsburgh, PA. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. General 1. Aluminum Sections: ASTM B221. 2. Aluminum Pipe: ASTM B241 3. Fasteners: FS-S-325, type as required by condition indicated. 4. Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A307 galvanized to ASTM A153 for galvanized r components. 5. Aluminum System a. Rails and Posts: 1-3/4 x 1-3/4 x 1 /4 inch square, extruded tubing. b. Fittings: Elbows, T-shapes, escutcheons; aluminum. C. Wall and ceiling brackets: aluminum. d. Mounting: Adjustable brackets and flanges, with steel inserts for casting in concrete and with steel brackets for embedding in masonry. e. Exposed Fasteners: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; consistent with design of railing. B. Floor Plate 1. ASTM A786, 3/16 inch thick, pattern no. 5. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery to site. 2. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. 3. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. 4. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk screws or bolts; unobtrusively located; consistent with design of component, except where specifically noted otherwise. 03879200 METAL FABRICATIONS 05500 - 2 06/01 —" A 5. Supply components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise. B. Railings 1. Fabricate with all joints mechanically attached with visually concealed, countersunk, allen head screws. 2.4 FINISHES A. Clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field conditions are acceptable and are ready to receive work. B. Beginning of installation means erector accepts existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. B. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. C. Obtain Architect approval prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. General 1. Maximum Variation From Plumb: 1 /4 inch in 10 feet. 2. Maximum Offset From True Alignment: 1 /4 inch. B. Gratings 1. Conform to ANSI/NAAMM MBG 531. 2. Maximum Space Between Adjacent Sections: 1 /4 inch. 3. Maximum Variation From Top Surface Plane of Adjacent Sections: 1 /16 inch. 3.4 SCHEDULE A. The Schedule is a list of principal items only. Refer to Drawing details for items not specifically scheduled. 1. Decorative aluminum frame: At locations indicated, clear anodized finish. END OF SECTION 03879200 METAL FABRICATIONS 06/01 05500 - 3 N SECTION 06114 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Blocking in wall. B. Wood furring and grounds. C. Concealed wood blocking for support of wall cabinets, and all other wall mounted equipment and accessories requiring support or other sections referencing this section. D. Telephone and electrical panel back boards. E. Preservative treatment of wood. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of steel fabrications embedded into masonry. B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Door openings to receive wood blocking. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards. B. ANSI A208.1 - Mat -Formed Wood Particleboard. C. APA/EWA (APA/The Engineered Wood Association) - Certification. D. ASTM A153 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) of Iron and Steel Hardware. E. ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. F. ASTM F568 Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Fasteners. G. AWPA C1 (American Wood Preservers Association) - All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. H. AWPA C9 Plywood, Pressure Treatment. I. AWPA C20 (American Wood Preservers Association) - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. J. AWPA C27 Plywood, Fire -Retardant Pressure Treatment. K. FS FF-N-105B Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes: Wire, Cut and Wrought. L. SPIB (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules. M. WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules. N. NLGA (National Lumber Rules Authority) O. WWPA (Western Wood Products Association). 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect all wood materials from warping or other distortion by stacking in vertical position, braced to resist movement. C. Keep all wood materials covered and dry. Provide air circulation within and around stacks. 03879200 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114 - 1 e- 06/01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. General 1. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for - moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. 2. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. B. Nailers and Miscellaneous Framing: Yellow Pine species, No. 2 and better grade, 19 percent maximum moisture content [, pressure preservative treat]. C. Plywood: APA, Grade C-D; unsanded. 2.2 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: _ 1. Fasteners: ASTM F568 and FS FF-N-105B, Hot dipped or Electro galvanized steel. 2. Decking Screws: Bugle head, hardened steel, power driven type, length three times thickness of sheathing cadmium plated or zinc coated. _ 3. Anchors: a. At Metal Studs: Flat or oval head sheet metal screws as required by project conditions. b. At Face Brick: Self tapping masonry anchors equal to Hilti Kwik-Con. C. At Mortar Joints: Expansion type anchors equal to Rawl wedge anchors. d. At Hollow Masonry: Resin injected screen anchors equal to Hilti HIT C20. e. At Grout Filled Masonry and Concrete: Expansion bolts or self tapping masonry anchors as required by project conditions. f. At Drywall: Equal to Hilti Togglers. B. Structural Framing Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. 2.3 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Shop pressure treat and deliver to site ready for installation, wood materials requiring pressure impregnated preservatives. B. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C1 using water borne preservative with 0.25 percent retainage. C. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashings and other exterior locations. D. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure site -sawn ends are similarly treated. E. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with cementitious materials, roofing and related metal flashings and all other exterior locations. B. Apply preservative treatment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Treat site -sawn ends. D. Allow preservative to cure prior to erecting members. -~ 03879200 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114 2 06/01 -p a-, 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Set members level and plumb, in correct position. B. Place horizontal members, crown side up. C. Space framing and furring 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. D. Install telephone and electrical panel back boards with plywood sheathing material where required. Size the back board by 12 inches beyond size of electrical panel. END OF SECTION 03879200 WOOD BLOCKING AND CURBING 06114 - 3 06/01 a-� SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cabinet units. B. Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. D. Prefinished exposed surfaces. E. Preparation for site finishing concealed surfaces. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 — Quality Requirements: Testing laboratory services. B. Section 06114 Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Seals at adjoining construction. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing of casework. E. Division 16 Electrical: Power, signal, and data wiring. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI A161.1 - Countertops. C. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. D. ANSI A208.2 — Medium Density Fiberboard. E. ASTM D1037 — Evaluating Properties of Wood -Base Fiber and Particle Panel Materials F. AWI - Quality Standards. G. BHMA A156.9 - Cabinet Hardware. H. BHMA All 56.11 - Cabinet Locks. 1. CID A -A 1936A - Adhesive, Contact. J. HPMA HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. K. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. L. NHLA - Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress M. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. N. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawing and Product Data 1. Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. 03879200 06/01 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 - 1 2. For shop drawings submitted in phases, number phases in sequential order and provide master cross reference indicating room number in numerical sequence, millwork elevation and shop drawing sheet where detailed. 3. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. B. Samples 1. Submit four 2 x 3 inch size samples of each color selected, illustrating counter top and cabinet finish. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform cabinet construction in accordance with AWI custom quality standards and as specified. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Water Resistant Particleboard 1. Willamette Industries; Albany, OR. 2. Fiber Resin Industries, Inc.; Oconomowoc, WI. 3. Flakeboard Company; St. Stephen, New Brunswick. 4. Hambro Forest Products; Crescent City, CA. B. Water Resistant Fiberboard 1. Sierra Pine; Martell, CA. 2. Gerogia Pacific; Sault Ste. Marie, Ont. C. Hardware 1. Julius Blum, Inc.; Stanley NC. 2. Grass America, Inc.; Kernersville, NC. 3. Hafele America Co.; Archdale, NC. 4. H.B. Ives; New Haven, CT. 5. Hewi, Inc.; Lancaster, PA. 6. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Co..; Grand Rapids, MI. 7. Liberty Hardware; Greensboro, NC. 8. Stanley Hardware; New Britain, CN. D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI custom grade, average moisture content of 8 percent. -- 03879200 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 - 2 06/01 "' 6 B. Hardwood Lumber: NHLA; graded in accordance with AWI premium grade; average moisture content of 8 percent. C. Softwood Plywood: PS-1; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer, lumber or particleboard, type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cuts D. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of hardwood veneer, lumber or particleboard; type of glue recommended for application. E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; Grade M-2 or M-3, composed of wood chips, medium density, with sanded faces. F. Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade MD. G. Thermoset Decorative Overlay Covered Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; Grade M-2 or M-3, composed of wood chips, medium density; surfaced with thermofused melamine. H. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 1 /4 inch thick, smooth one side. I. Thermoset Decorative Overlay Covered Hardboard: ANSI A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 1 /4 inch thick, smooth one side; surfaced with thermofused melamine. J. Plastic Laminate 1. Conformance: NEMA LD 3. 2. Grade a. Horizontal Exposed Surfaces: GP-50, 0.50 inch thick. b. Vertical Exposed Surfaces: GP-28, 0.28 inch thick. C. Backing Sheet: BK20, 0.20 inch thick backing grade, undecorated plastic laminate. 3. Color, Pattern, and Surface Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line. K. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130 contact adhesive. Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. L. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. M. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; Cadmium finish. N. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. O. Shelf Standards 1. Cabinet Mounted: BHMA All 56.9, Type B04071, cut for fitted rests spaced at 1 inch centers; chrome satin finish. 2. Wall Mounted: BHMA All 56.9, Type B04102, slotted for brackets spaced at 1 inch centers; chrome satin finish. P. Shelf Rests: BHMA All 56.9, Type B04081, chrome satin finish. Q. Shelf Brackets: BHMA All 56.9, Type B04112, formed steel brackets, chrome satin finish. R. Cabinet Drawer and Door Pulls: Extruded aluminum wire pull, satin finish, equal to Stanley no. 4484. S. Locker and Sliding Door Pulls: Cast nylon, semi -recessed type equal to Hewi no. 535.75. T. Locks 1. Conformance: BHMA A 156.11 2. Style a. Cabinet Drawers and Doors: Type E07261 at all locations. Provide locks with cams not requiring mortising or recessing into cabinet door or drawer front. 3. Finish: Satin chrome steel finish. 4. Keying: Master key all drug storage cabinets to one master key. Master key all other locks to separate master key. Provide two keys per lock. U. Catches: BHMA All 56.9, Type B03141. 03879200 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 - 3 06/01 V. Slides 1. Standard Drawers: BHMA Al56.9, Type B05051, with positive stop levers. 2. File Drawers: BHMA Al56.9, Type B05051 (100 lb. load rated), full extension type with positive stop levers. 3. Cupboard Slides: Equal to Hafele floor mounted pull-out system model no. 421.56.409. with ceiling guide model no. 421.57.406. W. Hinges: Semi -mortised, self closing, three dimensional adjustable type equal to Grass model no. 3604 screw -on hinge with winged base plate; brushed nickel finish. 2.3 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Finishing: Site finish of casework scheduled to receive opaque and transparent finishes specified in Section 09900. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General 1. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. 2. Fit shelves, doors, drawer fronts and other exposed and semi -exposed edges with veneer matching face finish as scheduled. Use one piece for full length only. 3. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. 4. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. 5. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. 6. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. 7. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic wood laminate finished surfaces. 8. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal cut edges. 9. If veneer core plywood drawer sides, backs, and subfronts are used, assemble using dovetail or French dovetail construction. 10. Fabricate drawers with bottoms set into sides, back, and front 1 /4 inch. B. Laminated Plastic -Covered Casework 1. Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 1600, reveal overlay style, using the following materials: a. Body Members: Melamine covered particleboard. b. Stiles and Rails: Poplar, Alder or medium density particleboard. C. Shelves: Medium density particleboard. d. Backs: Tempered hardboard. e. Drawer Sides, Backs and Subfronts: Poplar, Alder or other solid wood. f. Drawer Bottoms: Tempered hardboard or thermoset decorative overlay covered hardboard. g. Drawer Fronts: Medium density particleboard or fiberboard. h. Doors: Medium density particleboard or fiberboard. C. Transparent Finish Casework 1 . Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 1600, reveal overlay style, using the following materials: a. Body Members 1) Exposed: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. 2) Semi -exposed: Particleboard or thermoset decorative overlay covered particleboard. b. Stiles and Rails: Plain sawn red oak. 03879200 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 4 06/01 I C. Shelves 1) Exposed: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. 2) Semi -exposed: Rotary cut red oak veneer on particleboard core. Thermoset decorative overlay covered particleboard. d. Backs 1) Exposed: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. 2) Semi -exposed: Thermoset decorative overlay covered hardboard. e. Drawer Sides, Backs and Subfronts: Poplar, Alder or 7 ply veneer core plywood. f. Drawer Bottoms: Tempered hardboard or thermoset decorative overlay covered hardboard. g. Drawer Fronts: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. h. Doors: Plain sliced red oak veneer on plywood core. i. Door, Drawer and Shelf Edging: Veneer banding to match door and drawer faces. Countertops 1. Conformance: Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 400C. 2. Exposed Finish: GP-50 high pressure decorative laminate 3. Core a. Countertops Without Sinks: Particleboard or fiberboard. 4. Backing Sheet: BK-20. 5. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. 6. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops. 2.5 FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Finish for items scheduled to receive transparent or opaque finishes, specified in Section 09900 - Painting PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install casework and associated trim in accordance with AWI Section 1700. B. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. C. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops. E. Seal splashes and returns to countertop and wall with type sealant specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealants. r� F. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1 /32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. G. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. H. Anchorage Devices 1. General: Use concealed anchorage devices at all locations except where otherwise approved by Architect. b•, 03879200 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 - 5 a^ 06/01 2. Transparent or Opaque Finish Casework a. At exposed fixed locations, countersink and putty or countersink and conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. b. At exposed locations requiring removable panels, provide brass screws and countersunk finishing washers. 3. Laminated Plastic -Covered Casework a. At exposed fixed locations, provide cadmium coated screws with countersunk finishing washers. b. At exposed locations requiring removable panels, provide brass screws and countersunk finishing washers. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test substrate at countertops with sinks in conformance with ASTM D1037. B. Provide 2 pieces of substrate to testing laboratory, 12 x 12 inch in size taken from sink cutouts. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work in accordance with Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads. C. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.5 CLEANING A. Clean installed work in accordance with Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. END OF SECTION 03879200 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 - 6 06/01 SECTION 07210 BUILDING INSULATION PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, Uniform General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Acoustical insulation. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems. ., B. Section 09510 - Acoustical Ceilings: Supporting construction. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. C. ASTM E 1 19-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. D. ASTM E 413-87 Determination of Sound Transmission Class. E. NFPA 255 - Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. F. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to Uniform Building Code - 1997 for combustibility and smoke development requirements for materials as follows: 1. Flame Spread: 25 or less. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. B. Identify insulation with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide data on product characteristics, performance criteria, limitations. B. Manufacturer's Certificate 1. Certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements. e 1.7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install adhesives when temperature or weather conditions are detrimental to successful installation. 03879200 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 1 06101 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Protect insulations from physical damage and from becoming wet or soiled. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for handling, storage and protection. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flexible Insulation 1. Owens/Corning Corporation 2. CertainTeed 3. Manville Corp. 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600 2.2 MATERIALS A. Flexible Acoustical Insulation 1. Conformance: ASTM C 665, Type I, glass fiber batt. 2. Size: To fit framing spacing 3. Facing: Unfaced. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation. B. Verify insulation is dry. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install insulation in accordance with insulation manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install insulation without gaps or voids. 3. Place insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 4. Trim insulation neatly to fit spaces. B. Flexible Acoustical Insulation 1. Place between and tight to framing members. 3.3 SCHEDULES A. Flexible Acoustical Insulation 1. Walls: Install in stud space from floor to bottom of roof deck above in all walls where indicated on ceiling plan. 2. Ceilings: Install over top of ceiling in rooms indicated on ceiling plan. Install four feet wide over top of partitions separating all rooms noted to have insulation above ceiling. END OF SECTION 03879200 BUILDING INSULATION 07210 - 2 06/01 — SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. m- 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. Sealant and backing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07410 - Preformed Roof Panels: Sealants used in conjunction with paneling. B. Section 07536 - Modified Bitumen Roofing - Roofing system. C. Section 07600 - Flashing and Sheet Metal: Sealants used in conjunction with metal flashings. D. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts: Gaskets used in conjunction with framing and glazing methods. E. Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants used in conjunction with glazing methods. F. Section 08311 - Sliding Glass Doors: Gaskets used in conjunction with framing and glazing methods. G. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Sealants used in conjunction with sound rated partitions. H. Section 09300 - Tile: Sealants used in conjunction with tile. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AAMA 803.3 Voluntary Specification for Narrow -Joint Seam Sealer. B. AAMA 808.3 - Voluntary Specification for Exterior Perimeter Sealing Compound C. ASTM C719 - Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement. D. ASTM C792 - Effects of Heat Aging on Weight Loss, Cracking, and Chalking of Elastomeric Sealants. E. ASTM C570 - Oil and Resin - Base Caulking Compound for Building Construction. F. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. G. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. H. ASTM C1311 - Solvent Release Sealants. I. ASTM C1193 - Use of Joint Sealants. J. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. K. ASTM D1667 - Flexible Cellular Materials Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Closed -Cell Foam). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and color availability. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. 03879200 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1 06/01 B. Samples 1 . Submit four sample kits in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. C. Mockup 1. Construct field sample panel illustrating sealant type, color, and tooled surface. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted sample may not remain as part of the Work. D. Certificates 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements and are suitable for use indicated. 2. Joint sealant manufacturer's certification that sealants, primers, and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds. 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Conform to ASTM C1193 requirements for materials and installation. 1. Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 2. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. D. Preconstruction Field Testing: Prior to installation of joint sealants, field-test sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each type of elastomeric and non-elastomeric sealant joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mock-ups will be erected. 4. Test Method: Test joint sealants by hand pull method described below: a. Install joint sealants in 5-foot joint lengths using same materials and methods for joint preparation and joint sealant installation required for completed Work. Allow sealants to cure fully before testing. b. Make knife cuts horizontally from one side of joint to other followed by 2 vertical cuts approximately 2 inches long at side of joint and meeting horizontal cut at top of 2-inch cuts. Place mark 1 inch from top of 2-inch piece. C. Use fingers to grasp 2-inch piece of sealant just above 1-inch mark; pull firmly down at a 90-degree angle or more while holding a ruler along side of sealant. Pull sealant out of joint to distance recommended by sealant manufacturer for testing adhesive capability, but not less than that equaling specified maximum movement capability in extension; hold this position for 10 seconds. 5. Report whether or not sealant in joint connected to pulled -out portion, failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each type of product and joint substrate. 6. Evaluation of Field Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing. 03879200 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 2 06/01 1.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. If required by Owner, schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at minimum monthly intervals. B. Architect will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Architect, as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1. Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. 8. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. 1.7 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification Sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at work site prior to commencing work of the Section. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section. C. Notify Architect five days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting. 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes, and distribute copies within three days after meeting to participants, with three copies to Architect. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS A. Motors: Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections. B. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual specification sections. ram: r 03879200 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 3 06/01 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Verify that existing substrate is capable of structural attachment of new Work being applied or attached. C. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. D. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct location. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply any manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects: 1. Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching to complete Work, and to: rr 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. D. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. 1. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. J. Identify any hazardous substance or condition exposed during the Work to the Architect for decision or remedy. 3.4 ALTERATION PROJECT PROCEDURES A. Materials: As specified in product Sections; match existing products and work for patching and extending work. B. Employ skilled and experience installer to perform cutting and patching. C. Close openings in exterior surfaces to protect existing work from weather and extremes of temperature and humidity. 03879200 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS 01300 - 4 06/01 I 0 E. Field -Constructed Mock -Ups: Prior to installation of joint sealants, apply elastomeric sealants as follows to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects as well as qualities of materials and execution: 1. Joints in field -constructed mock-ups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receive elastomeric joint sealants specified in this Section. F. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. 2. Do not install sealants when joint substrates are wet. 3. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty. B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Elastomeric Sealants 1. General: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, urethane, polyurethane, or polysulfide polymer based elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920. 2. Types a. S-1: Type M, Grade P, Class 25. b. S-2: Type S, Grade P, Class 25. C. S-3: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. d. S-4: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. 03879200 06/01 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 3 B. Latex Sealants 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. 2. Types a. S-5; Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant 1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product accommodating joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent. 2) Conformance: ASTM C 834 b. S-6; Silicone Emulsion Sealant 1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. 2) Conformance: ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, ASTM C 920. 3) Special Properties: Fungus and mildew resistant. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. C. Type S-7; Acrylic Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3, with capability to withstand 15 percent maximum cyclic movement (7-1 /2 percent movement in both extension and compression) at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for Project without failing cohesively when tested for adhesion and cohesion per ASTM C 719. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. D. Type S-8; Butyl Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, nonstaining, paintable, solvent -release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids and tack -free time of 24 hours or less, complying with ASTM C 1311. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. E. Type S-9; Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard, solvent -release -curing, pigmented synthetic rubber sealant formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width, complying with AAMA 803.3 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. F. Accessories 1. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 2. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 3. Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. 4. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 5. Masking Tape: Non -staining, non -absorbing type as recommended by sealant manufacturer. 03879200 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 4 06/01 ^" I ., P" PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions and substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193. E. Install masking tape where required to protect adjacent finished surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's written instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1 /2 the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Remove and replace joint backing which has become wet, dirty, or exposed to weather for extended period of time. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. H. Tool joints concave in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's written instructions. 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. C. Cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants and repair so that repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Exterior Joints 1. Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2. 2. Horizontal traffic joints exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1 or S-2. 3. Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S-2, S-3 or S-4. 4. Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3 or S-4. 03879200 06/01 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 5 5. Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations: Sealant types S-3 or S-4. 6. Threshold Bedding: Sealant type: S-8. 7. Joints in Masonry Flashing: Sealant Type S-9. 8. Joints in Sheet Metal Flashing: Sealant Type S-9. B. Interior Joints 1. Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, or S-2. 2. Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S-2, S-3, or S-4. 3. Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3, S-4. 4. Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations: Sealant types S-3, S-4 or S-6. 5. Non-structural hollow metal doors and borrowed lites. Sealant types S-3, S-4 S-5, S-6 or S-7. 6. Non-structural perimeter seals around plumbing fixtures, joints between ceramic the and joints between ceramic the and dissimilar materials: Sealant type S-6. 7. Non-structural perimeter seals at joints between countertops, backsplashes and walls: Sealant type S-7. END OF SECTION 03879200 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 6 06/01 SECTION 08000 DOOR SCHEDULE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1-General Requirements apply to work of this section .� 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Door Schedule 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames ®" B. Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors C. Section 08410 Aluminum Entrances and Storefronts D. Section 08700 Hardware s-■* E. Section 08800 Glazing 1.4 GENERAL A. This section covers only the doors, frames and hardware as they relate to this project. -Requirements for quality and method of installation are covered in other appropriate section of the specifications or in the drawings. Refer to the drawings for locations required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 DOOR SCHEDULE A. The DOOR SCHEDULE lists door sizes, types, construction, frame sizes, types, detail locations on drawings, hardware sets and other remarks. 2.2 DOORS A. Door types, references by letter designation in the DOOR SCHEDULE, are located in the drawing set. 2.3 REMARKS A. Door schedule remarks. 1. Glazing a. G3 = 1 /4" Wire. 2. Label (Fire Resistive Rating). a. L1 = 20 minute. b. L3 = 90 minute. 03879200 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 1 �.. 06/01 3. Miscellaneous a. M1 = Flame at all sidelight, transom and windows to be 45 min. rated. b. M2 = Door hardware to be compatible with Owner's security card reader hardware. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION 03879200 DOOR SCHEDULE 08000 - 2 06/01 Door Schedule Door Fir Mark PR Size Frame Details pe Const Const Size Head Jamb Sill Remarks 2 01 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - L1 2 02 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - L1 2 03 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - L1 2 04 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - L1 2 05 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - L1 2 06 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - L1 2 07A 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - L1 2 07B 2-6x7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - 2 08A 3-Ox7-Oxi 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - L1 2 08B 2-6x7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - 2 10 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - L1 2 11 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - L1 2 12 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - L1 2 13 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - L1 2 14A 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - L1 2 14B 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - L1 2 16 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 A SCWD HM 5 7/8 4/A-104 4/A-104 SIM - L1 2 17 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 B SCWD HM 8 1/4 3/A-104 3/A-104 SIM - G1,L1,M1,M2 2 18 3-Ox7-Ox1 3/4 B SCWD HM 8 1/4 3/A-104 3/A-104 SIM - G1,L1,M1,M2 2 20 3-Ox7-Ox13/4 A SCWD X X - - - L3,M2 R:\projects\2000\8792.00\arch\Doorsc.doc Fm SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Standard non -rated and fire rated steel doors,transoms and frames. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. B. Section 08700 - Hardware. C. Section 08800 - Glazing. D. Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall: Prepared openings. E. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors and frames; bituminous coating. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board - 36 CFR Part 1191, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. ANSI/SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & Frames. C. ANSI A117.1 Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. D. ANSI A224.1 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. E. ASTM A167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. F. ANSI/ASTM A366 - Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold -Rolled, Commercial Quality. G. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, General Requirements. H. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1. MIL-M-17194C(2) - Metal, Expanded, Steel. J. SDI-107 - Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement --Application). K. SDI-113 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Apparent Thermal Performance for Steel Door and Frame Assemblies. L. SDI-114 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Acoustical Performance for Steel Door and Frame Assemblies. M. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. N. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to requirements of 36 CFR Part 1191. 2. Conform to NFPA 80 and NFPA 252 for fire rated class indicated 03879200 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081 10 - 1 06/01 B. Manufacturer 1. Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Indicate each type door and frame elevation, reinforcements, hardware locations, metal types and guages, and finish. Use same numbering system as indicated on drawings. 2. Indicate frame configuration, anchor spacings and anchor types. 3. Indicate door core construction and head and sill closure method. 4. Indicate cut outs for glazing and louvers, glazing stop and glazing frame profiles and methods of attachment. 5. Manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Certificates 1. Manufacturer's Certificate certifying that Products and fabrications meet or exceed specified requirements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Provide frames with manufacturer's standard sill spreader bar for all welded units. B. Protect doors and frames with manufacturer's standard resilient packaging. C. Break seal on -site to permit ventilation. - 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide one year manufacturer's warranty. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Doors and Transoms 1 . Interior: 18 gage stretcher level steel conforming to ASTM A366. 2. Exterior: 16 gage stretcher level steel conforming to ASTM A366. B. Frames 1. Interior: 16 gage steel conforming to ASTM A366. C. Protective Coatings 1. Bituminous Coating: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 2. Primer: Manufacturer's standard oven dried, gray alkyd enamel primer, complying with requirements of ANSI/SDI A224.1. D. Accessories 1. Jamb Anchors a. Steel Stud Construction: Z type, same gage and material as frame. 2. Silencers: As specified in Section 08700 - Hardware. 3. Glazing Stops: Rolled steel, square profile, mitered corners; prepared for countersunk style flat head sheet metal screws. 4. Door Glazing Frames: Rolled steel, beveled profile, mitered corners; prepared for countersunk style thru-bolts at fire rated doors and flat head sheet metal screws at non - fire rated doors. 03879200 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 06/01 2.2 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate doors and frames to sizes and profiles indicated and in conformance with, except as otherwise specified, SDI-100, for non -rated assemblies and NFPA 80 and NFPA 252 for rated assemblies. 2. Fabricate frames and doors with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. 3. Attach fire rated label to each frame and door unit. 4. Grind all welds smooth, fill all voids with body putty and seam filler and sand smooth. Welds and joints shall not be visible. B. Doors 1. Interior doors: Grade II, Model 2, STC 38 where scheduled. 2. Close top edge of doors with flush steel channel closure. Seal joints watertight. 3. Close bottom edge of doors with inverted steel channel closure. 4. Core Construction, Interior Doors a. Type f: Vertical steel stiffeners formed from not less than 20 gage steel, spaced not more than 6" apart, and securely attached to face sheets by spot welds, not more than 6" on center. 5. Core Construction, Fire Rated Interior Doors a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 252. C. Frames 1 . Fabricate and assemble as complete welded unit. 2. Weld Z anchors to frame. 3. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. 4. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide for three single silencers on strike side of single doors and two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions. 5. Provide minimum 14 gage steel floor angle clips welded to each jamb. 2.3 FINISH A. Finish: As Specified in SECTION - 09900. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General 1 . Install frames in accordance with SDI-105 and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Coordinate with masonry and gypsum wallboard wall construction for anchor placement. 3. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. 4. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor. 5. Install field applied hardware in accordance with SDI-107. 3.2 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1/16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. n 03879200 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 3 a*w 06/01 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION 03879200 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4 06/01 '" SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated and fire rated flush wood doors to receive transparent finish. B. Cut outs for glass panels. C. Metal door lite surround frames. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames. B. Section 08700 - Door Hardware. C. Section 08800 - Glazing. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing doors. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI/HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. C. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. ASTM E413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class. E. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. F. NFPA 252 - Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. G. NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association. ` -' H. UL 10B - Fire Tests of boor Assemblies. I. Warnock -Hersey - Certification Listings for fire doors. t. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, and identify cutouts for glazing. 2. Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics; and factory finishing criteria. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions 1. Indicate special installation instructions. D. Manufacturer's Certificates 1. Certify that doors meet or exceed specified requirements and requirements of NWWDA standards referenced. 2. Certify that doors meet or exceed adhesive bond test of NWWDA T.M.-6. 03879200 .•a 06/01 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 1 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NWWDA Industry Standard I.S. 1-A for Flush Wood Doors. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to NFPA 252. B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect doors with manufacturer's standard sealed resilient packaging. C. Handle doors with clean hands or while wearing clean gloves. D. Store doors in flat position, raised above floor, not in damp or wet areas or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. E. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on -site to permit ventilation. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term: 1. Exterior Doors: Life of Installation. 2. Interior Doors: Life of Installation. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Doors 1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.; Algoma, WI. 2. Eggers Industries, Inc.; Two Rivers, WI. 3. VT Industries, Inc.; Holstein, IA. 4. Weyerhaeuser; Marshfield, WI. 03879200 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -2 06/01 B. C. Door Lite Surround Frames 1. Air Louvers, Inc.; Pico Rivera, CA. 2. Anemostat Door Products; Carson, CA. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Lumber 1. Transparent Finish: NHLA first grade, plain sawn Red Oak, Walnut at corridor doors, kiln dried to maximum 10 percent moisture content. B. _ Cores 1. Solid Core a. Non -Fire Rated: ANSI 208.1, grade 1-LD2 particleboard, minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density. b. Fire Rated 1) 20 Minute Rated: ANSI 208.1, LD2 fire retardant treated particleboard, minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density. 2) 1 1 /2 Hour Rated: Manufacturer's standard mineral core. C. Veneers 1. Transparent Finish: .050 inch thick, NWWDA Custom, A grade, Red Oak, Walnut at corridor doors, species wood, plain sliced. D. Glazing Stops 1. Rolled steel shape as detailed, mitered corners; prepared for countersink style tamper proof screws; designed to conform to UL requirements. E. Adhesives 1. Interior Doors: Type 11 - water resistant. F. Transom Panels: 1. Transom panels, where indicated, to match door and have same fire resistive rating. 2.3 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate fire rated doors to meet fire ratings scheduled in accordance with ASTM E84 classifications for flame spread/smoke developed of 20/45. Attach fire rating label to door edge. 2. Fabricate doors to thickness scheduled. 3. Veneer Match a. Between Individual Pieces of Veneer: Slip Match. b. Assembly on Door Face: Running Match. C. On Pairs of Doors: Pair Match. d. On Door/Transom Panel: End Match. 4. Hardware a. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with templates furnished by hardware supplier at locations indicated in NWWDA I.S.1.7-87 - Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors. b. Do not machine for surface hardware. C. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware. B. Flush Face Doors 1. Solid Core: Fabricate in accordance with NWWDA I.S. 1 and 1-A for 5 ply construction except as otherwise specified, with finish as scheduled. 2. Bonding a. Wood Cores: Type A - bonded. b. Mineral Cores: Type A - bonded. 03879200 06/01 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 C. Transom Panels: Fabricate to same requirements specified for door(s) in same opening with solid bottom edge. 2.4 FINISH A. As specified in Section 09900 - PAINTING. - PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify frame opening conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of -tolerance for size or alignment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Trim non -rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 3/4 inch. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. D. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. E. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders. F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08110 and �- hardware specified in Section 08700. G. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. H. Install door louvers, plumb and level. 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Telegraphing: 1 /10 inch measured with straight edge in any three inch span. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1 /8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1 /8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1 /8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION 03879200 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4 06/01 !�71' SECTION 08700 HARDWARE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. All finish hardware necessary for completion of project. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames B. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications 1. Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years experience. B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Fire Door Hardware a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and 101 for doors shown, scheduled, or specified to be in a fire rated wall or to receive a UL-label. b. In case of conflict between hardware specified and NFPA requirements, provide type required by NFPA. C. Provide door hardware listed by UL or Warnock Hersey or other testing laboratory approved by code authority having jurisdiction. d. Provide hardware tested in accordance with NFPA 252. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (NEMA LB3-1995) - Performance Standards for Nigh Pressure Decorative Laminate. B. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) 1. ANSI All 17 Building and Facilities - Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People. 2. ANSI All 56.1 Butts and Hinges. 3. ANSI All 56.2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. 4. ANSI All 56.3 Exit Devices. 5. ANSI All 56.4 Door Controls - Closers. 6. ANSI A156.5 Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products. 7. ANSI A156.6 Architectural Door Trim. 8. ANSI A156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions. 9. ANSI A156.8 Door Controls - Overhead Holders. 10. ANSI A156.12 Interconnected Locks &Latches. 11. ANSI A156.13 Mortise Locks & Latches. 03879200 HARDWARE 08700 - 1 06/01 12. ANSI A156.15 Closer Holder Release Devices. 13. ANSI A156.16 Auxiliary Hardware. 14. ANSI A156.18 Materials and Finishes. 15. ANSI A156.21 Thresholds 16. ANSI A156.23 Electromagnetic Locks C. BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA) 1. BHMA Directory of Certified Locks & Latches. 2. BHMA Directory of Certified Door Closers. 3. BHMA Directory of Certified Exit Devices. D. CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR) 1. 36CFR Part 1 191 - Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) E. DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE (DHI) 1 . DHI-02 Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. 2. DHI-03 Keying Systems and Nomenclature. 3. DHI-04 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Door and Frames. 4. DHI-05 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames. 5. DHI A115 Wood Door Preparation Standards F. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) 1. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows. 2. NFPA 101 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 3. NFPA 105 Installation of Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies. G. Texas Civil Statutes, Article 9102, Architectural Barriers Act, Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) 1. TAS 4.13.8 Door Thresholds 2. TAS 4.13.9 Door Hardware 3. TAS 4.13.10 Door Closers H. UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES, INC. 1. Building Materials Directory. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on specified hardware. 2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation instructions. 3. Provide wiring diagrams, electrical characteristics, and product data on all electrically controlled devices. B. Hardware Schedule 1. Include for each item: Quantities; manufacturer's name and catalog numbers; sizes; detail information or catalog cuts; finishes; door and frame size and materials; location and hardware set identification using same opening numbers as indicated on the drawings; lock trim material thicknesses; lock trim material evaluation test results; corresponding ANSI/ BHMA standard type number or function number from manufacturer's catalog if not covered by ANSI/ BHMA; and list of abbreviations. 2. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. 3. Indicate lock side of single cylinder doors. 4. Include master cross reference indicating door numbers in numerical sequence and associated hardware set. C. Keying Schedule 1. Hold a keying conference with the Owner to develop a keying schedule. 2. Develop schedule in accordance with DHI-03. 3. Obtain keying system approval before delivering hardware to project. 03879200 HARDWARE 08700 - 2 06/01 4. Unless otherwise indicated or requested, provide keying as follows: a. Key all doors different and key all doors to the same room alike. b. Key all exterior doors alike. C. Master key all doors except mechanical room doors to one key. d. Key mechanical room doors to [existing] utilities master key system. D. Certificates of Compliance 1. Submit certificates of compliance attesting that hardware items conform to the NFPA, CFR and ANSI/ BHMA standards specified. In lieu of certificates, submit statement that proposed hardware items appear in current BHMA directories of certified products. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Submit certificates of compliance, attesting that doors which are indicated, scheduled, or specified to be fire rated are fitted with the required hardware (i.e. active latch bolts, self -closing devices) and operate in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 80 and 101. Identify all such doors on certificates. E. Closeout Submittals 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01700. 2. Provide list of actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. 3. Submit data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements adjustment methods and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 4. Furnish spare parts data, including a complete list of parts and supplies and source of supply, for locksets, exit devices, closers, electronic locking devices and electro-magnetic closer holder release devices. 5. Submit special tools required for hardware adjustment or control. 6. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish 6 complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and trouble shooting guides. 7. Submit simplified "as installed" diagrams for electronic locking devices and electro- magnetic closer holder release devices. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle hardware to site in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. B. Individually package each article of hardware in manufacturer's standard commercial carton or container, and properly mark or label to be readily identifiable with approved hardware schedule. C. Tag or otherwise identify each change key with door for which its cylinder is intended. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate requirements for hardware to be mounted on metal doors or metal frames between hardware manufacturer and door or frame manufacturer to establish location, reinforcement required, size of holes, and similar details. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty for door closers. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Blank keys: Provide one for each lock scheduled. B. Provide 10 extra cylinder cores for each master key group. 03879200 HARDWARE 08700 - 3 06/01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hinges 1. Bommer; Landrum, SC 2. Hager Hinge Co.; St. Louis, MO 3. McKinney Manufacturing Co.; Scranton, PA 4. Stanley Hardware Division, Stanley Works; New Britain, CT B. Lock and Latches 1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; City of Industry, CA 2. Best Lock Corporation; Indianapolis, IN 3. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 4. PDQ Industries, Inc.; Leola, PA 5. Sargent Division, ESSEX Industries, Inc.; New Haven, CT 6. Schlage Lock Co.; San Francisco, CA C. Electromagnetic Locks 1. Loknetics Security Engineering; Forestville, CT 2. Von Duprin, Inc.; Indianapolis, IN D. Exit Devices 1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 2. Norton Door Controls; Charlotte, NC 3. Sargent Division ESSEX Industries Inc.; New Haven, CT 4. Von Duprin, Inc.; Indianapolis, IN E. Closers 1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 2. LCN Closers Division, Schlage Lock Co.; Princeton, IL 3. Norton Door Controls; Charlotte, NC F. Gasketing/Threshholds 1. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO 2. Pemko Manufacturing Co.; Memphis, TN 3. Reese Enterprises, Inc.; Rosemount, MO 4. Zero International, Inc.; Bronx, NY G. Door Stops/Bumpers 1. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 2. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO 3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.; Wallingford, CT 4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA H. Door Silencers 1. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 2. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.; Wallingford, CT 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA 1. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. General 1 . Provide hardware components as indicated in paragraph HARDWARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section. 2. Schedule is based on products manufactured by Schlage, LCH, Hager and Von Duprin. �- Components of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with the ANSI/BHMA standards for Grade 1 products and are listed in the latest edition of the BHMA Directories of certification. -- 03879200 HARDWARE 08700 - 4 06/01 3. Regardless of whether or not the HARDARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section has every door and every component scheduled for each opening, provide all components required to make every opening functional based on hardware scheduled for similar openings and the referenced codes. B. Exit Devices and Exit Device Accessories 1. General a. Provide dust proof floor strikes for vertical rod devices. b. Provide manufacturer's standard filler to extend exit device beyond door lite frames where door lites extend below exit device. Factory cut or form filler to match profile of exit device trim. C. Closers 1. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Size one size larger than manufacturer's published recommendations, but not less than size 5. 2. Size requirements for other closers: Conform to manufacturer's published recommendations, except as specified otherwise. 3. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Provide parallel arms or top jam mount closers for outswinging exterior doors. 4. Provide narrow projection closers for doors close to a wall so as not to strike wall at 90- degree open position. 5. Operating Pressure: Provide closers with maximum operating pressure as follows: a. Interior Doors: Set closing force on doors accessible to the physically handicapped for a push-pull of 5 pounds applied at knob or handle. b. Exterior Doors: Maximum 8.5 pounds. C. Fire Rated Doors: Set to minimum required to relatch door. D. Accessories 1. Special Tools: Provide special tools such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging keys, required to adjust hardware items. E. Fastenings 1. Provide proper type, size, quantity, and finish with each article of hardware. 2. Gypsum Wallboard: Provide nylon or derlin expansion anchors equal to Hilti "Togglers". 3. Provide one-way or tamperproof screws on exterior doors equipped with half or full surface hinges. F. Fire Door Hardware 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. G. Finishes 1. Painting of primed surfaces: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 2. Conform to ANSI All 56.18 as follows: a. Hinges: BHMA 626. b. Lock and door trim: BHMA 626. C. Door closers: BHMA 630. d. Miscellaneous hardware: Finish appearance to match door hardware. e. Aluminum housed weatherstripping: Finish appearance to match door hardware. f. Thresholds: Finish appearance to match door hardware. H. Keying 1. Provide an extension of existing keying system. 2. Key locks in sets or subsets. 3. Furnish locks with the manufacturer's standard construction key system. 4. Send keys directly from lock manufacturer to Owner by registered mail or other approved means. 5. Supply keys in following quantities: a. 2 keys for each lock b. 3 master keys C. 3 grand master keys 03879200 HARDWARE 08700 - 5 ,, 06/01 d. 6 construction keys e. 2 control keys. 6. Furnish keys to Owner arranged in a container for key control system storage in sets or subsets as scheduled. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on shop drawings. B. Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Locate in accordance with DHI 04 and DHI 05 recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and DHI Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Install in accordance with DHI-02. 3. When approved, slight variations in locations or dimensions will be permitted. 4. Attach door control devices for exterior doors such as closers and holders to doors with thru bolts such as sex bolts and nuts. 5. Conform to 36CFR Part 1191 and ANSI A117.1 for positioning requirements for handicapped. B. Door -Closing Device 1. Install and adjust in accordance with templates and printed instructions supplied by manufacturer. 2. Insofar as practicable, mount closer on room side of door for doors opening to or from halls and corridors. C. Auxiliary Hardware 1. Install lever extension flush bolts at top and bottom of inactive leaf of pairs of doors. 2. Install dust -proof floor strike or threshold, cut-out for bottom bolt D. Gasketing 1. Install at inside edge of hinge, head and latch side of door frame. E. Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors 1. Install in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80 AND NFPA 105. 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW-1 Opening No's 02, 03, 04, 05, 06, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14A, 14B, 16 Each opening to have: 3 ea. Hager Butts BB1279 4 '/2 x 4 '/2 626 1 ea. Schlage Lock D92RD 626 1 ea. LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SMB AL 1 ea. Hager Stop 236W 630 3 ea. Hager Silencers 307D 03879200 HARDWARE 08700 - 6 06/01 ' , HVV'2 Opening No'o74'84'17'18 Each opening tohave: 3eo' Hager Butts BBY'-84l6x 4}2 636 1oa' SchlageLock Set 636 1 ea' LCN Closer 4111 ED4 x SMB AL 3ea. Hager Silencers 3O7D HW-3 Opening No'oO1 Each opening to have: 3 ma. Hager Butts BB 1279 4 16 x4 l6 626 1 ea. Sch|ageLever Latch Set 636 1 ea. LCN Closer 4111 EDA x SK8B 4L 1 me. Hager Stop 230\N 630 3ma. Hager Silencers 3O7D HVV-4 Opening No'o2O Each opening tohave: 3 ma. Hager Butts B012 794 ]6 x4 }6 626 1 ma. Sch|ageLock Set 636 1 ma. LCN Closer 1 EO/�x SK8B 4L ' 1ea. Hager -to' 2—~— 630 3eo. Hager Silencers 3O7D � HVV'5 Opening No'o7B'8B Each opening tohave: 3 ma' Hager Butts BB12794 1/2 x4 Y2 626 1 ea. SchlogeLever Lonkaet 626 3ea. Hager Silencers 3O7O END OFSECTION ' 03878300 HARDWARE 06/01 087OO'7 ram» SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General` Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass glazing for Sections referencing this Section for products and installation. B. Glass for hollow metal frame work. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and sidelites. B. Section 08211 — Flush Wood Doors: Glazed Doors. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings. B. ASTM C864 - Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal, Gaskets, Setting Blocks and Spacers. C. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. D. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass. E. ASTM C1048 Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. F. ASTM C1172 - Laminated Architecture Flat Glass. G. ASTM C1281 — Preformed Tape Sealants for Glazing Applications. H. ASTM C1311 - Solvent Release Sealants. I. GANA - Glazing Manual. J. GANA - Sealant Manual. K. FS TT-C-00598 - Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Size glass to withstand dead loads and positive and negative live loads acting normal to plane of glass as calculated in accordance with ASCE 7-95 code to a design pressure of 20 Ib/sq ft as measured in accordance with ANSI/ASTM E330. B. Limit glass deflection to 1 /200 flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Glass: a. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. 03879200 GLAZING 08800 - 1 a'�+ 06/01 b. Polycarbonate material manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning materials and methods. C. Provide copy of manufacturer's sample warranty. 2. Glazing Sealants, Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual [, SIGMA] and GANA Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent Work. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide Warranties in accordance with Section 01700. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Flat Glass Materials 1. Libbey-Owens-Ford Co. 2. PPG Industries, Inc. 3. Spectrum Glass Products, Inc. 4. Viracon. B. Glazing Compounds 1. Dow Corning Corp. 2. GE Silicones. 3. Norton Co. 4. Pecora Corp. 5. Tremco Mfg. Co. 6. VIP Enterprises, Inc. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Glazing 1. G 1 - Wired Glass: ASTM C1036, Type II - Wired Glass, Flat; Class 1 - Translucent; Form 1; Quality q8 glazing; Mesh, m2 - Square; conforming to ANSI Z79.1, thickness as noted on drawings. 03879200 GLAZING 08800 - 2 06/01 B. Glazing Compounds 1 . Modified Oil: FS TT-G-410; color as selected by Architect. 2. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1085; Shore A hardness of 10-20 color as selected by Architect; non -skinning. C. Glazing Accessories 1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1 /16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. 2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. 3. Glazing Tape: ASTM C1281, preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; size as required for glazing channel; black color. 4. Glazing Gaskets: ASTM C864 Resilient type as recommended by glazing manufacturer for framing system furnished with extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 2. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 4. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows: a. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. b. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. 5. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. 03879200 GLAZING 06/01 08800 - 3 6. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. B. Interior Glazing 1. Dry Method (Preformed Gaskets) a. Fabricate compression gaskets in lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with stretch allowance during installation. b. Secure compression gaskets in place with joints located at corners to compress gaskets producing a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. C. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer. d. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops. e. Install wedge gasket with sufficient pressure to attain full contact of gasket on opposite side of glazing. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is complete. C. Clean glass and mirrors. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. END OF SECTION 03879200 GLAZING 08800 - 4 06/01 rs. PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Framing accessories. C. Acoustical insulation. k , D. Acoustical sealant. E. Gypsum board. F. Taped and sanded joint treatment. G. Texture finish. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing. B. Section 06100 - Rough Carpentry: Wood framing and furring; Gypsum sheathing applied over wood framing. _ C. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Wood blocking for support of surface mounted accessories specified in other sections. =+ D. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Acoustical insulation. E. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames. F. Section 09900 - Painting: Surface finish. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM B221 - Aluminum -alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. ^` B. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. C. ASTM C475 - Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. D. ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. E. ASTM C665 - Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing. F. ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Board. G. ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. H. ASTM C919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. I. ASTM C954 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases to Steel Studs from 0.033 inches to 0.112 inches in Thickness. J. ASTM C1002 - Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board or Metal Plaster Bases. K. ASTM C1007.- Installation of Load Bearing (Transverse and axial) Steel Studs and Related .-. Accessories. L. ASTM C1047 - Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. M. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. N. ASTM Ell 19 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 03879200 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 1 ,, 06/01 0. FM 1-21 - Fire Resistance of Building Assemblies. P. GA-214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. Q. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual. R. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory. S. WHI - Certification Listings. 5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Acoustical Attenuation for Identified Interior Partitions: STC 48 in accordance with ASTM E90. B. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. C. Partition Component Sizes and Spacings: Provide steel framing members as indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions: 1. Interior Partitions a. Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 Ibf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. b. Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 5 Ibf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. C. Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 7.5 Ibf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. d. Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 10 Ibf per sq. ft., spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. 2. Ceiling Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754, maximum deflection of L/240 and deadload of 5 Ibf per sq. ft. minimum, spaced at 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum five years documented experience. B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies: a. Fire Rated Partitions: Listed assembly by UL No. (see partition schedule). b. Fire Rated Ceiling and Soffits: Listed assembly by UL No. (see partition schedule). C. Material Compatability 1. Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. C. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. D. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. E. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 03879200 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 2 06/01 r K.. 4; r 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions 1. General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Room Temperatures a. For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F. b. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. C. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources. 3. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Metal Studs 1. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Dale Industries 3. Unitech 4. Dietrich 5. Alabama Metals Corp. 6. Celotex Building Products 7. G-P Gypsum Corp. 8. National Gypsum Co. 9. United States Gypsum Co. B. Gypsum Board 1. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Celotex Building Products 3. G-P Gypsum Corp. 4. National Gypsum Co. 5. United States Gypsum Co. C. Insulation 1. United States Gypsum Co. + 2. Celotex Building Products 3. G-P Gypsum Corp. 4. National Gypsum Co. 5. United States Gypsum Co. D. Accessories 1. United States Gypsum Co. 2. Celotex Building Products 3. G-P Gypsum Corp. 4. National Gypsum Co. 5. United States Gypsum Co. E. Substitutions: Section 01600 - Product Requirements. 03879200 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 3 06/01 2.2 MATERIALS A. Framing 1. Exterior Non -axial Load Bearing Studs and Tracks: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, C shaped sized in accordance with the requirements specified in paragraph "SYSTEM DESCRIPTION". 2. Interior Studs and Tracks a. To Receive Gypsum Board: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick (unless otherwise required by partition height for loading specified), C shape, with knurled faces. Double 20 gage studs at door frame jambs. 3. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ASTM C645. 4. Interior Channels: ASTM C645; Hot or Cold -rolled steel, rust inhibitive coating. 5. Steel Resilient Furring Channels: Manufacturer's standard product designed to reduce sound transmission, fabricated from steel sheet complying with ASTM A 525 or ASTM A 568 to form 1/2-inch-deep channel of the following configuration: a. Single -Leg Configuration: Asymmetric -shaped channel with face connected to a single flange by a single slotted leg (web). b. Double -Leg Configuration: Hat -shaped channel, with 1-1/2-inch-wide face connected to flanges by double slotted or expanded metal legs (webs). C. Configuration: Either configuration indicated above. 6. Deflection Track: Galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick, C shaped, with minimum 3 inch legs offset 5/8 inch at the midpoint. Track equal to "Shadowline" design by Fire Track. B. Gypsum Board 1. Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, square edges. 2. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, square edges. C. Accessories 1. Acoustical Insulation: ASTM C665; preformed mineral fiber, friction fit, Type I unfaced, thickness as indicated. 2. Acoustical Sealant: ASTM C1311; Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; black in concealed locations; color as selected from manufacturer's standard in exposed locations. 3. Trim: a. Corner Beads: ASTM C1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, 1-1/4 inch wide flanges. b. Edge Trim: ASTM C1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, types as indicated. 4. Furring Brackets: ASTM C645; galvanized steel. Serrated -arm type, adjustable, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch, designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring. 5. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water. 6. Wall Texture: Latex based non -aggregated texturing material. 03879200 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 4 06/01 low r PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Metal Studs 1. General a. Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. b. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center (regardless of fire rated partition a; allowances for wider spacings except where otherwise indicated. 2. Form all corners using conventional three stud framing. 3. Interior Partitions a. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending to finished ceiling only and for partitions extending through the ceiling to the structure above: b. Non -Fire Rated Partitions _;0_ 1) Extend stud framing to ceiling only. C. Fire Rated Partitions 1) Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid deflection transfer to studs. 2) Provide deflection track at head of all full height partitions and install in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. 4. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on r each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs. 5. Blocking: Screw wood blocking to studs. Bolt or screw steel channels to studs. Install blocking for support of finish carpentry items, wall cabinets, and hardware. 6. Coordinate installation of wood bucks, anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing. B. Metal Wall Furring 1. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete block walls. 2. Erect furring channels horizontally; space maximum 16 inches on center, not more than 6 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. 3. Install furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated and manufacturer's instructions. C. Acoustical Accessories 1. Place acoustical insulation in partitions tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and around electrical and mechanical items within or behind partitions, and tight to items passing through partitions. 2. Install acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with ASTM C919, ASTM E497, and manufacturer's instructions. 3. Caulk all penetrations of partitions by conduit, pipe, duct work, and rough -in boxes, in conformance with ASTM E497. r�- D. Gypsum Board 1. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Erect single layer standard gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 03879200 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 5 �;, 06/01 3. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. 4. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. 5. Double Layer Applications a. Use gypsum backing board for first layer, placed perpendicular to framing or furring members. Use fire rated gypsum backing board for fire rated partitions. b. Place second layer perpendicular to first layer. Offset joints of second layer from joints of first layer. 6. Control Joints a. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as required by ASTM C840. b. Install control joints centered above each jamb of all door frames. Extend control joint from top of frame head to top of partition. 7. Place corner beads at all exposed external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials at all exposed locations. Leave a 1 /4 inch space between edge trim and dissimilar material. Seal joint with sealantu specified in Section 07900. E. Joint Treatment 1. Gypsum Board: Install joint treatment in conformance with ASTM C840 and to level as defined by GA-214 and as scheduled at the end of this Section. F. Texture Finish 1. Walls: Spray or Roller apply light finish texture coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved sample, to all surfaces scheduled to receive paint. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from plumb and true Flatness: 1 /8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 3.4 JOINT TREATMENT SCHEDULE A. Level 1: All gypsum board surfaces concealed above ceilings. B. Level 2: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive ceramic tile and behind fixed millwork. C. Level 3: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive spray applied texture wall coverings. D. Level 4: All gypsum board surface scheduled to receive Type II wall coverings. E. Level 5: All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive paint. END OF SECTION 03879200 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 6 06/01 SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical tile. C. Non -fire rated assemblies. D. Perimeter trim. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 07210 - Building Insulation: Acoustical Insulation over Acoustical Ceilings. B. Section 15932 - Air Outlets and Inlets: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. C. Section 16515 - Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C423 Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. B. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings C. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels. D. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. E. ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. F. ASTM E 119-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. G. ASTM E1111 Measuring the Interzone Altenuation of Ceiling Systems. H. ASTM E1414 Airborne Sound Altenuation Between Rooms Sharing a Common Ceiling Plenum. I. ASTM E 1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products J. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Fire Resistance Directory, System Ratings. K. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Building Materials Directory. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and ceiling panels with five years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience. 03879200 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 1 != 06/01 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Provide acoustical tile with the following surface burning characteristics as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: 1. Flame Spread: Class I, 0-25. 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. B. Identify acoustical the with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting organization. 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on metal grid system components, acoustic units, accessories. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit four samples, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating material and finish of acoustic units. 2. Submit four samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner, and edge trim. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical units to project site in original unopened packages. B. Store materials in enclosed space protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight and surface contamination. C. Handle acoustic units carefully to avoid chipping edges or surface finish. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F., and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation. 1.10 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 2 boxes of each type acoustical ceiling unit specified to Owner. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Suspension Systems 1. Grid - Type C 1 units a. Conformance: ASTM C635, intermediate duty, as required for ceiling tile scheduled. b. Type: Exposed T. 03879200 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 2 06/01 C. Finish: Factory applied white baked enamel. d. Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. 2. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, edge moldings and hold down clips as required for suspended grid system. B. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure 4. acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1 /360. C. Acoustic Units 1. Conformance: ASTM E1264. r. 2. Type C1 a. Size: 24 x 24 inches. b. Thickness: 3/4 inches. C. Type: Ill. d. Form: 3. e. Light Reflectance: 75 percent. f. NRC Range: 0.65 - 0.75. g. CAC Ranger Minimum 40. h. Fire Hazard Classification: None. i. Edge Detail: Square. j. Surface Color: White. k. Pattern: D. 3. Type C2 ^^ a. Size: 24 x 48 inches. b. Thickness: 3/4 inches. C. Type:lil. e�? d. Form: 3. e. Light Reflectance: 75 percent. f. NRC Range: 0.65 - 0.75. g. CAC Range: Minimum 40. h. Fire Hazard Classification: None. i. Edge Detail: Square. j. Surface Color: White. '- k. Pattern: D. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. C. Verify that walls and partitions are plumb and straight within specified tolerances. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Suspension System 1. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636, manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this Section. 2. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1 /360 maximum. 3. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. 4. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. 03879200 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 3 a* 06/01 rL 5. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 6. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. 7. Center system on room axis leaving equal border units no less than 50 percent of acoustical unit size in accordance with reflected ceiling plan. 8. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. 9. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently. 10. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. 11. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. B. Acoustic Units 1. Fit in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. 2. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces. 3. Install level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. 4. Rabbet edges of field cut reveal edge border the to match factory edges. Paint field cut edges to match factory finish. C. Accessories 1. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 10 ft of an exterior door [and in conformance with fire rated ceiling design requirements.] 2. Install light fixture boxes constructed in accordance with UL assembly requirements. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1 /8 inch in 10 ft. B. Maximum variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum. END OF SECTION 03879200 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 4 06/01 SECTION 09680 ^' CARPETING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glue down carpet. B. Adhesives, floor fillers, edge strips and accessories 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09650 - Resilient Flooring and Base: Base finish. B. Section 09915 — Color and Finish Schedule. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM D 1335 Tuft Bind of Pile Floor Covering. C. ASTM D 1423 Twist in Yarns by the Direct -Counting Method. D. ASTM D 2257 Extractable Matter in Yarns. E. ASTM D2859 Flammability of Finished Textile Floor Covering Materials. F. ASTM D 3936 Delamination Strength of Secondary Backing of Pile Floor Coverings. G. (CPSC) Publication: 16 CFR 1630 Standard for the Surface Flammability of Carpet and Rugs. H. (AATCC) Test Methods: 16E-1982 Colorfastness to Light: Water -Cooled Rev 85 Xenon -arc ^� Lamp, Continuous Light. I. AATCC Crockmeter Method: 165 Colorfastness to Crocking. J. CRI 104 - Standard for Installation of Commercial Carpet. . K. NFPA 253 - Standard Method of Test for Critical Radiant Flux for Floor Covering Systems r Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Indicate seaming plan, method of joining seams, direction of carpet. 2. Provide product data on specified products, describing physical and performance characteristics; sizes, patterns, colors available, and method of installation. 3. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Closeout Submittals 1. Submit in accordance with Section 01700. 2. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested methods and schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re -waxing. C. Samples 1. Submit four samples 12 x 12 inch in size illustrating color and pattern for each carpet material specified. 03879200 CARPETING 09680 - 1 06/01 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in woven carpet with ten years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with 5 years minimum documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable UBC and NFPA 101 code as indicated on drawings for fire performance ratings as follows: 1 Flooring, critical radiant flux (CRF): Minimum 0.45 watt per square centimeter, per ASTM E 648 and NFPA 253. 2. Flooring, smoke density: Maximum 450 per ASTM E662. 3. Surface Flammability Ignition: Conform to ASTM D2859. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain minimum 70 degrees F ambient temperature three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. C. Ventilate installation area during installation and for 3 days after installation. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Carpet 1. rCollins and Aikman B. Sub -floor Filler 1 . W.W. Henry Co., Huntington Park, CA. C. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Carpet 1. F1: Vinyl back multicolor textured loop, direct glue equal to Collins & Aikman, Explorer. B. Accessories 1. Sub -Floor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Primers and Adhesives a. Waterproof; of types recommended by carpet manufacturer. 3. Edge Strips: Vinyl type, smooth finish, color as selected from manufacturer's standard. 03879200 CARPETING 09680 - 2 06/01 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that substrate surfaces are smooth and flat and are ready to receive work. 1. Measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled freestanding 10-foot-long straightedge, resting on two high spots and placed anywhere on the surface, does not exceed 118 inch. 2. Deviation from edge of construction; control or expansion joint to adjacent edge: No deviation allowed. B. Verify concrete floors are dry to a maximum moisture content of 7 percent; and exhibit negative carbonization, or dusting. C. Alkalinity: pH range of 5-9. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Remove sub -floor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with sub -floor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave smooth, flat, hard surface. C. Prohibit traffic until filler is cured. D. Vacuum floor surface. 3.3 INSTALLATION V.-IN A. Lay out rolls of carpet for approval. B. Verify carpet match before cutting to ensure minimal variation between dye lots. C. Double cut carpet, to allow intended seam and pattern match. Make cuts straight, true, and unfrayed. D. Locate seams in area of least traffic. E. Fit seams straight, not crowded or peaked, free of gaps. F. Lay carpet on floors with run of pile in same direction, or as directed by manufacturer, for -- anticipated traffic. G. Do not change run of pile in any room where carpet is continuous through a wall opening into another room. Locate change of color or pattern between rooms under door centerline. H. Cut and fit carpet around interruptions. I. Fit carpet tight to intersection with vertical surfaces without gaps. J. Apply carpet and adhesive in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. K. Install carpet in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and CRI 104 Section 8 Direct Glue -Down Installation. 1. Apply contact adhesive to floor uniformly at rate recommended by manufacturer. After sufficient open time, press carpet into adhesive. 2. Apply seam adhesive. Lay adjoining piece with seam straight, not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps. 3. Roll with appropriate roller for complete contact of adhesive to carpet backing. L. Complete installation of edge strips, concealing exposed edges. Bind cut edges where not concealed by edge strips. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean and vacuum carpet surfaces. 03879200 CARPETING 09680 - 3 �-* 06/01 3.5 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic from carpet areas for 24 hours after installation. 3.6 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 120 sq ft of carpeting in each color/pattern as specified. Deliver to Owner as directed. END OF SECTION 03879200 CARPETING 09680 - 4 06/01 SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Surface preparation. B. Surface finish schedule. C. Color selection schedule. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Texture on gypsum wallboard surfaces. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM D16 - Definitions of Terms Relating to Paint, Varnish, Lacquer, and Related Products. B. ASTM D1730 - Practices for Preparation of Aluminum and Aluminum Surfaces for Painting. C. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. D. ASTM D2092 - Practice for Preparation of Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) Steel Surfaces for Painting. E. ASTM D2486 - Test Method for Scrub Resistance of Interior Latex Flat Wall Paints. F. ASTM D3359 - Test Methods for Measuring Adhesion by Tape Test. G. ASTM D4138 — Test Method for Measurement of Dry Film Thickness of Protective Coating Systems by Destructive Means. H. ASTM D4540 - Guide for Testing Interior Latex Semigloss and Gloss Paints. I. ASTM D4541 - Test Method for Pull -Off Strength of Coatings Using Portable Adhesion Testers 1.5 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ANSI/ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with five years experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with five years documented experience. C. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to applicable code for Class I A respectively flame spread/smoke development rating requirements for finishes of 0-25/0-450. 03879200 PAINTING 09900 - 1 06/01 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Provide product data on all [stripping and] finishing products. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed application instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit two samples 6 x 6 inch in size illustrating range of colors and textures available for each surface finishing product scheduled, for selection. C. Certificates 1. Submit paint manufacturer's certificate(s) stating the following: a. Paints for interior use contain no mercurial mildewcide. b. Paints for interior use contain no insecticide. C. Paints for interior use contain no more than 0.06 percent lead. d. Paints proposed for use meet the VOC regulations of the local Air pollution District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which the project is located. D. Field Samples 1. Provide field sample panel, 48 inches long by 48 inches wide, illustrating special coating color, and finish. 2. Locate where directed. 3. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 4. Provide test panel areas adequate in size to show method and expected final surface for each surface. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. C. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. D. Store paint'materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 50 percent, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F. for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Synthetic Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. E. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candies measured mid -height at substrate surface. -a 10 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide a one gallon container of each color to Owner at location designated. B. Label each container with color and room locations, in addition to the manufacturer's label. 03879200 PAINTING 09900 - 2 06/01 "`" r^+ PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. ICI Paint Stores, Cleveland, OH. B. Kelly -Moore Paint Co., Inc., San Carlos, CA. C. PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, PA. D. Sherwin Williams. E. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Coatings 1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 3. Compatable with existing coatings in renovation areas. B. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve finishes specified, of commercial quality. C. Stripping Agents: As recommended by manufacturer for finish to be removed. 2.3 FINISHES A. Refer to schedule at end of Section for surface finish schedule. B. The schedule is based on the products of ICI Paint Stores and Kelly Moore Paint Co., Inc. as follows: No. Product Name (ICI Paint) 1. 1030 PVA Primer/ Sealer 2. 1 110 Ultra -Hide Stain Jammer 3. 1310 Ultra -Hide Prime-n-Finish 4. 1370 Spraymaster DTG 5. 1402 Dulux Professional Wall & Trim Enamel 6. 1406 Dulux Professional Wall & Trim Enamel 7. 1434 Ultra -Wall Enamel 8. 1482 Spray Master Pro Uni-Grip WB 9. 1516 Ultra -Hide Wall & Trim Enamel 10. 1582 Spray Master Dryfall 11. 1700 Woodpride Stain 12. 1808 Woodpride - WB Interior Varnish 13. 1802 Woodpride Interior Varnish 14. 1916 QD Sanding Sealer 15. 2000 Decra-Shield exterior primer 16. 2406 Decra-Shield 17. 2516 Ultra -Hide Durus Exterior Enamel 18. 3038 Ultra -Hide Durus 19. 4000 Bloxfil Block Filler 20. 4020 Devflex DTM Primer 21. 4308 Devguard Industrial Enamel 22. 4160 Devguard Tank & Structural Primer 23. 4206 Devflex Acrylic 24. 4406 Tru-Glaze-WB Type Latex Vinyl Toluene Alkyd Alkyd -Flat Latex - Eggshell Latex -Semi Gloss Latex, Low Lustre Latex -Eggshell Alkyd, Semi -Gloss Alkyd -Eggshell Alkyd - Oil Waterborne Clear Gloss Aquacrylic-Satin Vinyl Toluene Acrylic -Latex Acrylic -Semi -Gloss Alkyd -Semi -Gloss Acrylic Gloss Acrylic Acrylic Alkyd -Gloss Alkyd Waterborne Acrylic, Semi -Gloss Waterborne Epoxy, Semi -Gloss 03879200 PAINTING 09900 - 3 !^ 06/01 25. HF10 High Heat Coating 26. 26. HT-12 No. Product Name (Kelly -Moore) 1. 70 Kel-Guard Silicone, Flat High Heat Silicone, Flat Type Synthetic Rubber C. Dry mill film thickness (DMFT) indicated is minimum acceptable. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by product manufacturer. B. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application. C. Moisture Content 1. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. a. Field test concrete in accordance with ASTM D4263. b. Test moisture content of wood in accordance with ASTM D2016. 2. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below following maximums: a. Gypsum Soffits: 12 percent. b. Plaster: 12 percent. C. Masonry, Unit Masonry: 12 percent. d. Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. e. xterior Located Wood: 12 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. f. Concrete Floors: 7 percent. g. Vertical Concrete Surfaces: 12 percent. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Unpainted Surfaces 1. General a. Prepare surface in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended procedures unless higher level of preparation is specified. b. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing. C. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. d. Shellac and seal marks on wood surfaces which may bleed through surface finishes. 2. Impervious Surfaces a. Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach. b. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. 3. Insulated Coverings a. Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton. 4. Galvanized Surfaces a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D1730. b. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. C. Apply coat of etching primer. 03879200 PAINTING 06/01 09900 - 4 ram, 5. Aluminum Surfaces a. Clean in accordance with ASTM D1730. �., b. Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. C. Apply coat of etching primer. 6. Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces a. Clean concrete in accordance with ASTM D4258. b. Clean unit masonry in accordance with ASTM D4261. C. Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale, salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. d. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodium phosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. e. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with a solution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. f. Allow to dry. 7. Plaster Surfaces a. Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. b. Make smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. C. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces. 8. Interior Wood a. Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. b. Seal knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. C. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. d. Fill open grain wood to receive opaque finish with wood filler. ,.., e. Fill nail and other anchor holes in wood to recieve transparent finish with filler stained to match finish. 9. Wood Doors a. Seal top and bottom edges with clear or opaque primer as required for finish scheduled. B. Primed and Previously Painted Surfaces 1. All Surfaces a. Thoroughly clean of all grease, dirt, dust or other foreign matter. b. Remove blistering, cracking, flaking, peeling or other deteriorated coating. C. Roughen slick/glossy surfaces. r, d. Repair damaged areas such as, but not limited to, nail holes, cracks, chips and spalls with suitable materials to match adjacent areas. e. Feather edges of chipped paint and sand smooth. f. Sand and scrape to remove loose primer. g. Feather edges to make touch-up patches inconspicuous. h. Clean surfaces with solvent. i. Prepare non-ferrous surfaces in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation. j. Chemically Strip surfaces bare to substrate where indicated on drawings. 2. New Shop Primed Steel Surfaces a. Where higher level of preparation is specified in this Section than in other Sections for unpainted steel, comply with requirements of this Section and following: 1) At Contractor's option, either shop or field prepare steel in accordance with procedures specified in this Section. 2) If steel is shop prepared and primed in accordance with lesser requirements specified in other sections, it is considered a temporary protective coating only. �^ 3) Remove temporary shop coatings and prepare steel in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation for unpainted surfaces. 03879200 PAINTING 09900 - 5 06/01 b. If steel is shop prepared and primed in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation, field prepare in accordance with paragraph "All Surfaces" above. C. Prime coat specified under paragraph 3.9, SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE, can be eliminated except for bare areas requiring touch-up. 3. Existing Steel Surfaces - a. Prepare in accordance with paint manufacturer's recommended level of preparation. 3.3 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.4 APPLICATION A. Paint, Stain and Varnish 1 . Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. 3. Apply each coat to uniform finish. 4. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. 5. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. 6. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. 7. Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. Wipe excess from surface. 8. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork with primer paint. 9. Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnish reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits. 3.5 FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT A. Refer to Section 15391 for schedule of color coding and identification banding of equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. _ B. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, occurring in finished areas except where painting of scheduled wall or ceiling surface can only be accomplished by also painting these items. C. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. D. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers and grilles to match face panels. E. Paint exposed conduit, boxes and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. F. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installing equipment. G. Color code equipment, plumbing piping, and exposed ductwork in accordance with requirements indicated. Color band and identify with flow arrows names and numbering. H. Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. 03879200 PAINTING 09900 - 6 06/01 n I. Shop Primed Equipment 1. Remove louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical components and paint separately. 2. Prepare and paint shop primed equipment as specified for base material and location. J. Shop Painted Equipment ,�. 1 . Prepare and paint shop painted equipment as specified for base material and location as follows: a. Interior Finished Spaces (excluding mechanical and electrical rooms): Paint surfaces to match color of adjacent finish. This applies, but is not limited to, r- mechanical diffusers and electrical panels and covers. b. Exterior Equipment: Where noted on drawings, paint exposed mechanical and electrical equipment color as selected by Architect. 3.6 PROTECTION OF DISSIMILAR METALS AND METALS IN MASONRY AND CONCRETE A. Where specified in other sections, protect dissimilar metals that are in direct contact and metals set on or filled with mortar or concrete with one coat of coal tar paint equal to Carboline Bitumastic Super Service Black. 3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. General 1. When requested by Architect, provide verification of coating application and durability in accordance with specified requirements at no cost to the Owner. B. Steel Surfaces 1. Dry Film Thickness: Verify in accordance with SSPC-PA 2 - Measurement of Dry Paint Thickness with Magnetic Gages. 2. Adhesion: Confirm adhesion of coating system to substrate in accordnace with either ASTM D3359 (Method B) or ASTM D4541. C. Concrete Floors 1 . Verify compliance in accordance with ASTM D1546. D. Other Surfaces 1 . Film Thickness a. Measure wet film thickness in accordance with ASTM D4414 and convert to dry film thickness by multiplying wet film thickness by percent soilds and by percent solvent added. b. Measure dry film thickness in accordance with ASTM D4138. E. Scrubbability 1. Test interior flat latex paints in accordance with ASTM D2486. F. Interior Latex Semigloss and Gloss Paints: Test in accordance with ASTM D4540. G. High -Performance Interior Architectural Wall Coatings: Test in accordance with ASTM D3730. 3.8 ADJUSTING A. Reapair surfaces which have been destructively checked for dry film thickness. B. Recoat surfaces determined not to be in conformance with dry film thicknesses specified. C. Recoat in accordance with coating manufacturer's printed instructions. 3.9 CLEANING A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. 03879200 PAINTING 09900 - 7 ^* 06/01 C. Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. 3.10 SURFACE FINISH SCHEDULE A. Interior Surfaces Surface 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Concrete Concrete Walls 1030 Varies 14060.4) 1406 Concrete Floors 700.0) 700.0) Concrete Masonry (CMU) 3010 Varies 1406 (1.4) 1406 (1.4) Plaster Primed 1482 1482 Ferrous Metals Doors and Frames, 4160(2.0) 1516 (2.0) 1516 (2.0) Railings, Equipment Galvanized Metal Ducts, 1370 151.6(2.0) 1516(2.0) Louvers, Piping, Vents Wood Drawer 1802 0.0) 1802 (1.0) & Cabinet Thin 50% Thin 25% Interiors Transp. Finish. - Trim, Transp. 1802 (1.0) 1802 0.0) Finish Thin 50% Thin 25% J Trim, Transp. 1600 Varies 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) Finish (Stained) Thin 50% Thin 25% Cabinets, Ext. 1600 Varies 1802 0.0) 1802 0.0) & Interiors Thin 50% Thin 25% Transp. Finish -- (Stained) Cabinets, Ext. 1310 (1.5) 1516 (1.4) 1516 (1.4) & Interiors Opaque Finish. 03879200 PAINTING 09900 - 8 06/01 Surface 1st Coat (DMFT) 2nd Coat (DMFT) 3rd Coat (DMF) Wood Doors Transp. Finish 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) Thin 50% Thin 50% Stained & Transp. Finish 1600 Varies 1802 (1.0) 1802 (1.0) Thin 50% Thin 50% 3.11 COLOR SELECTION SCHEDULE END OF SECTION 03879200 PAINTING 06/01 09900 - 9 *� &� 8ECT|ONOSS15 COLOR SCHEDULE PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' ^ A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 ' General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES ' ^ A. Color Schedule. 1.3 RELATED WORK ' A. Section06411 ' Plastic Laminate Covered Casework. B. Section O8211 -FluohVVood Doors. C. Section O851O'Acoustical Ceilings. D. Section OS05O-Resilient Flooring and Base. E. Section O98@O-Carpet. F. Section OSSOO - Painting' G. Section 10260 — VVaU Guards, HandraUmond Corner guards. 1'4 REFERENCES A. The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced. The publications are referred tointhe text bYthe basic designation only. 1.5 GENERAL A. This section covers only the color ofthe interior materials and products that are exposed to view inthe finished construction. The word ^co|or"omused herein includes surface color and pattern. Requirements for quality and method ofinstallation are covered inother appropriate sections ofthe specifications. Specific locations where the various materials are required are shown onthe drawings. |tennm not designated for color inthis section may be specified in other sections. When color is not designated for items, the Contractor shall propose a color for approval. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2'1 REFERENCE TOMANUFACTURER'S COLOR A. Where color is shown as being specific to one manufacturer, on equivalent color by another manufacturer may bosubmitted for approval. Manufacturers and materials specified are not intended to limit the selection of equal colors from other manufacturers. 2.2 COLOR SCHEDULE A. The color schedule Omto the colors, patterns and textures required for exterior and interior finishes, including both factory applied and field applied colors. ' 03879200 COLOR, FINISH AND DOOR SCHEDULES 09915 ' 1 OG/O1 2.3 INTERIOR FLOOR FINISHES Flooring materials shall be provided to match the colors listed below. F1 Carpet Collins & Aikman, Explorer 25007 "Nile Brown" F2 YCT Armstrong, Standard Excelon 51858 "Sandrift White" 2.4 INTERIOR BASE FINISHES Base materials shall be provided to match the colors listed below. 131 4" Resilient Roppe, 700 Series P191 "Camel" `y 2.5 INTERIOR WALL FINISHES Interior wall color shall apply to the entire wall surface, including reveals, vertical furred spaces, grilles, diffusers, electrical and access panels, and piping and conduit adjacent to wall surfaces unless otherwise specified. Items not specified in other paragraphs shall be painted to match adjacent wall surface. Wall materials shall be provided to match the colors listed below. W1 Paint, GWB Kelly Moore KM555-L "Wood Plank" M W2 Paint, Existing Plaster Kelly Moore KM555-L "Wood Plank" 2.6 INTERIOR CEILING FINISHES Ceiling colors shall apply to ceiling surfaces including soffits, furred down areas, grilles, diffusers, registers, and access panels. Ceiling color shall also apply to joist, and conduit and piping where joists and deck are exposed and required to be painted. Ceiling materials shall be provided to match the colors listed below. C1 2x2 Acoustic C2 2x4 Acoustic 2.7 INTERIOR MISCELLANEOUS Miscellaneous items shall be provided to match the colors listed below. P1 Trim Paint Kelly Moore KM554-L "Jocobean" P2 Stain Match Existing P3 Laminate -Countertop Nevamar MK-2-2T "Greige Matrix" P4 Corner Guards Pawling, Pro-Tek 370 "Eggshell" 2.8 REMARKS A. Finish Schedule Remarks 1 . Patch plaster on window sills and column furrings before painting 2. Corner guard locations indicated on drawings 3. Patch acoustical ceiling to match existing. 03879200 COLOR, FINISH AND DOOR SCHEDULES 09915 - 2 06/01 "a" r 2.10 FINISH SCHEDULE See attached Finish Schedule. PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE) END OF SECTION 03879200 COLOR, FINISH AND DOOR SCHEDULES 06/01 09915 - 3 2.10 Finish Schedule Room No Description Walls Ceilings Miscellaneous Colors Floor Base N E S W Type Ht (ft-in) Remarks Door Frame Millwork 201 SEC/RECEPTION AREA F1 61 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 9'-0" 2 P2 P1 P4 202 ASSIST CHIEF F1 131 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 9'-0" 1,2 P2 P1 P4 203 CONFERENCE ROOM F1 61 W1/W2 W1/W2 W1/W2 W1/W2 C1 9'-0" 1,2 P2 P1 P4 204 CHIEF'S OFFICE F1 131 W1/W2 W1/W2 W1/W2 W1/W2 C1 9'-0" 1,2 P2 P1 P4 205 ADMIN ASSISTANT F1 61 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 9'-0" P2 P1 206 INTERVIEW F1 B1 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 9'-0" P2 P1 207 IA OFFICE F1 B1 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 9-10" P2 P1 208 IA OFFICE F1 61 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 9'-0" P2 P1 209 CORRIDOR F1 B1 W1 W1 W1 W1 C2 9'-0" 2 P2 P1 P4 210 CORRIDOR F1 61 W1 W1 W1 W1 C2 9'-0" 2 P2 P1 P4 211 LIEUTENANT F1 131 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 9'-0" 2 P2 P1 P4 212 SERGEANT F1 B1 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 9'-0" P2 P1 213 LEGAL F1 B1 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 9'-0" P2 P1 214 WORK F2 61 W1/W2 W1/W2 W1/W2 W1/W2 C2 9'-0" 1,2 P2 P1 P3,P4 215 ADMIN CONFERENCE ROOM F1 B1 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 9'-0" 2 P2 P1 P3,P4 216 HALL F1 61 W1 W1 W1 W1 C1 9'-0" 2 P2 P1 P4 217 WAITING AREA - - - - - - - - P2 P1 218 LOBBY X X/B1 X - X/W1 X/W1 X X 3 P2 P1 219 ELEVATOR LOBBY X X/B1 - X X/W1 X/W1 X X 3 - - 220 CORRIDOR X X X X X X X X - - 221 MECHANICAL X - - - - - - - - - 222 CORRIDOR X X X X X X X X - - R:\Arch\13j1\IFinishsc.doc rft. SECTION 10260 _-* WALL GUARDS, HANDRAILS AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Corner guards. B. End -wall guards. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: .In -wall supports. B. Section 09250 -Gypsum Board Systems: Wall construction. e 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Corner guards to resist lateral impact force of 100 Ibs at any point without permanent damage. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Provide plans indicating locations for corner guards and end -wall guards. Indicate attachment details and recommended spacing for all components. B. Product Data 1. Indicate physical dimensions, system features, wall mounting brackets with mounting measurements, anchorage details, and rough -in measurements. C. Certificate 1. Certify that products meet or exceed flame spread rating of 25 and smoke development of 450 in accordance with ASTM E84 for surface finish. �-- 1.7 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate work with wall or partition Sections for installation of concealed blocking or anchor devices. 03879200 WALL GUARDS, HANDRAILS AND CORNER GUARDS 10260 - 1 06/01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Muncy, PA. B. Institution Product Corp.; Muskego, WI. 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Corner Guard 1. Cover: Molded vinyl/acrylic, .078 inch thick, 3 inch wide with 1 /4 inch corner radius. 2. Cover Retainer:.063 inch thick continuous extruded aluminum. 3. End Caps: Molded, high -impact type, color to match corner guard. 4. Finish: All exposed vinyl/acrylic to have matte finish pebble grain texture, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. 5. Acceptable Product: Construction Specialties model SM-20. B. End Wall Guard 1 . Cover: Molded vinyl/acrylic, .078 inch thick x width of finish wall with 1 /4 inch corner radiuses. 2. Cover Retainer:.063 inch thick continuous extruded aluminum. 3. Cushion: Manufacturer's standard shop applied sponge neoprene. 4. End Caps: Molded, high -impact type, color to match corner guard. 5. Finish: All exposed vinyl/acrylic to have matte finish pebble grain texture, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. 6. Acceptable Product: Construction Specialties model FSC-25. C. Accessories 1. Mounting Brackets and Attachment Hardware: Appropriate to component and substrate. 2. Vinyl Cove Base Support: Manufacturer's standard rigid aluminum. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams. B. Predrill holes for attachment. -� C. Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that rough -in for components are correctly sized and located. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position. B. Position corner guard flush with finished floor, extend to 48 inches high. C. Install end -wall guards full height from floor to ceiling. D. Install vinyl cove base support at base of end -wall guards. T 03879200 WALL GUARDS, HANDRAILS AND CORNER GUARDS 10260 - 2 06/01 - 3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES A. Wall Guards and Handrails 1. Maximum Variation From Required Height: 1 /4 inch. 2. Maximum Variation From Level For Visible Length: 1 /4 inch END OF SECTION 03879200 WALL GUARDS, HANDRAILS AND CORNER GUARDS 06/01 10260 - 3 SECTION 10522 -, FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS, AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets. B. Fire Extinguishers C. Accessories 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Roughed -in wall openings. B. Section 09250 — Gypsum Board Systems. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Field paint finish. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to NFPA 10 requirements for extinguishers. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NFPA 10 - Portable Fire Extinguishers. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Indicate physical dimensions, operational features, color and finish, wall mounting brackets with mounting measurements, anchorage details, rough -in measurements, location, and details. B. Product Data 1. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed operation and maintenance data. a. Include test, refill or recharge schedules, procedures, and re -certification requirements. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Do not install extinguishers when ambient temperatures may cause freezing. W-1 03879200 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 1 ., 06/01 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Brackets 1. L. Industries, Bloomington, Minnesota. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Co., Minneapolis, Minnesota. 3. Potter-Rommer, Inc., Cerritos, Calif. B. Substitutions: In accordance with Section 01600. 2.2 EQUIPMENT A. Fire Extinguishers 1. Fire Class: A,B,C 2. Type: Dry Chemical 3. Capacity: 5 pounds 4. Range: 15 feet 5. UL Rating: 2A 106C 6. Shell Material: Enameled Steel 7. Weight: 18lbs. B. Cabinets 1. Formed 18 gage galvanized sheet steel, semi -recessed type, size to accommodate extinguishers. 2. Trim: Maximum 1/4 inch return to wall surface, 1 1/4 inch wide face, extruded aluminum. 3. Door: Clear acrylic flat with extruded aluminum frame, clear anodized finish. 4. Mounting Hardware: Appropriate to cabinet. 5. Cabinet not to extend more than 4" from wall surface. C. Fire Extinguisher Brackets: Manufacturer's standard as required to fit extinguisher specified 2.3 FABRICATION A. Form body of cabinet with tight inside corners and seams. B. Predrill holes for anchorage. C. Form perimeter trim and door stiles by welding, filling, and grinding smooth. D. Hinge doors for 180 degree opening with continuous piano hinge. Provide nylon catch. 2.4 FINISHES A. Extinguishers: Red enamel. B. Cabinet Interior: White baked enamel. C. Cabinet and Door Frame: Clear anodized finish. D. Brackets: Red enamel. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify rough openings for cabinet are correctly sized and located. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 03879200 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 2 06/01 3.2 INSTALLATION .- A. Cabinets 1. Install one cabinet at each location noted FEC on drawings. 2. Install plumb and level in wall openings. 3. Mounting height from finished floor to inside bottom of cabinet as detailed on drawings. 4. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Brackets 1. Install one bracket at each location noted FEB on drawings. 2. Install plumb and level. 3. Mounting height from finished floor in accordance with NFPA 10. 3.3 SCHEDULE A. Cabinets 1. FEC: Install one fire extinguisher in each cabinet. B. Brackets 1. Install one I fire extinguisher at each bracket location. 03879200 END OF SECTION FIRE EXTINGUISHERS, CABINETS AND ACCESSORIES 10522 - 3 ,�—• 06/01 P� they are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. F. The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. G. The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. H. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. J. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. K. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1 . Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. L. Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. M. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. N. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the accompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item 99073 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 2 06/01 ri required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. O. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work is not indicated on the respective "M", "P" & "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is �^ assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. 1.4 DIMENSIONS A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. 1.5 INSPECTION OF SITE A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical and electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. 1.6 ELECTRICAL WIRING A. All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished ^ by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. 1.7 MOTORS AND CONTROLS A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Division 16 shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls of the types specified or required. 99073 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 3 06/01 C. These starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics and shall provide thermal overload protection. All starters shall be standard of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. They further shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire. 1.8 PROGRESS OF WORK A. The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner. 1.9 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 1 .10 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Architect before proceeding. C. The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to major manufacturers' items of equipment. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. F. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. , 1.1 1 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be the sole judge of equality. B. Within 30 days of being awarded the Contract for any section or sections of the work under this heading, the Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. If the material is not submitted within 30 days of the contract signing, the Contractor shall furnish the specified materials. 99073 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 4 06/01 W rg C. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. 1 .12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. C. Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. 1 .13 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required ,.. temporary shelters to adequately protect any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the incompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. e•^ 1.14 PERMITS, FEES, ETC A. The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit from the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including sewer, water, gas and electric services as applicable. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor 99073 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 5 06/01 shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these specifications. 1.15 TESTING A. The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. 1 .16 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.17 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install", and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1 .18 COOPERATION AND CLEANING UP A. The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his work with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. B. At all times during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris. The Contractor shall, on direction at any time from the Architect, clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the premises free of all obstructions and hindrances. 99073 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 6 06/01 e-� 1.19 COORDINATION OF TRADES A. The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades. For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details B. Items furnished under various sections which require plumbing connections shall be coordinated for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel, clearances for service, auxiliary devices required, etc. C. Items requiring insulation shall be fully insulated and that insulation shall be checked against manufacturer's directions and job requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish. D. Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. E. All items specified under Divisions 15 and 16 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades. 1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. Verify the scope of this work at the site and in cooperation with all other trades before bidding. B. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. C. The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. D. Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required under the respective section with all trades. E. In all spaces where new work under Division 15 and 16 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. F. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect. - 99073 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 7 06/01 1.21 PAINTING A. Painting for Divisions 15 and 16 shall be as follows: 1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and miscellaneous metal. 3. Paint all exposed sheet metal. 4. Paint all insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment, etc. Surfaces until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained. B. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal or insulation surface is visible. 1.22 SEALING A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors by packing fire resistant rope and fire resistant cement. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.23 ACCESS PANELS A. Wherever mechanical and/or electrical equipment is installed and where future access is required through either walls or ceilings and such cannot be obtained through the removable ceiling or through other means, the Contractor shall provide Milcor Style "M" access doors at least 12 inches by 12 inches in size or larger if required for access. Provide access doors for all fire dampers, smoke dampers, valves, etc. 1.24 OWNERS OCCUPANCY A. It shall be understood that the building in which the work is to be done is a necessary part of the Owner's operation, and shall continue in use throughout the construction period without interruption. Take all precautions required by the Owner for the protection of his equipment and property. B. Contractor shall cooperate with the owner in scheduling areas in which work is permitted. Owners schedule will govern. 1.25 SCHEDULE OF WORK A. Under no condition shall any work be done in the present building that would interfere with its natural use during its normal hours of occupancy, unless special permission is granted by the Owner. This is particularly applicable where new connections are to be made to present lines or items of equipment in that building or where present equipment items in that building are to be relocated or modified in any way. The Contractor shall include this scheduling requirement in his proposal as no additional compensation for overtime work will be granted. 1.26 WORKING TIME A. Where new connections are to be made into existing lines, present lines must be relocated or rerouted, present equipment items relocated or other work accomplished that would affect the operation of the present building, the work shall be carried on at such times as to cause a minimum of interference with the normal operation of that 99073 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 8 06/01 building. In certain cases the work may be accomplished during normal working hours _- -, during certain designated seasons or times of the year. In other cases the work may have to be executed during times of the day outside of the normal working period, on holidays, etc. Each individual case presents a separate decision as to the time during which it shall be performed. The Contractor involved shall present each case to the Architect for his decision, which will be made after due consultation with the Owner. No additional compensation for overtime will be granted for compliance with these requirements. 1.27 RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS A. B There are portions of the existing plumbing system, heating, ventilating and air conditioning system and electrical System which shall remain in use to serve the finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. By actual examination at the site, each bidder shall determine those portions of the remaining present installations which must be relocated to avoid interferences with the installations of new work of his particular trade and that of all other trades. All such existing installations which interfere with new installations shall be relocated by the Contractor under the Division in which the existing material normally belongs, and in a manner as directed by the Architect. For example: 1. Existing Plumbing piping, etc. shall be relocated under Division 15 where it interferes with the installation of new work. 2. Where existing piping, ductwork, etc. interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 15. 3. Where existing conduit and electrical equipment interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 16. Failure to become familiar with the extent of the relocation work involved shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility and shall not be used as a basis for additional compensation. Specifically, relocate piping and conduit as required to install the new ductwork. .° 1.28 SALVAGE MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall remove existing equipment, piping, duct, grilles, conduit, wire, junction boxes, light fixtures and other items associated with the mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems where shown on the drawings. Where such items are exposed to view or uncovered by any cutting or removal of general construction and has no ^ continuing function (as determined by the Architect), they shall be removed by the contractor under the section in which the item normally falls. B. Existing items (see above) where concealed in/above construction which is not disturbed, abandon in place. Plug, cap, disconnect or otherwise render harmless all such items. C. All items or materials removed from the project shall be made available for the Owner's inspection. The Owner retains the option to claim any item or material. Contractor shall deliver any claimed item or material in good condition to the place designated by the Owner. All item not claimed become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the site. 1.29 SLEEVE DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall, before concrete is poured, prepare 1 /8" scale floor plan drawings on tracing paper and shall show on these drawings, with dimension lines, the size and location of every pipe sleeve required for the passage of his lines. Prints shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to the setting of the pipe sleeves. 99073 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 9 06/01 r-. 1.30 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect for his information. 1.31 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT A. The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. B. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect. C. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings. D. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. 1.32 MARKING OF PIPE A. The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system _ by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. Markers shall be painted on using stencils. B. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Marker on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers. C. Size of Identification: Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters (" Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 99073 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 10 06/01 s 1.33 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. ^� The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For example, pumps will be identified as P-1, P-2, P-3, etc.; exhaust fans will be EF-1, EF-2, etc.; AC Units will be AC-1, AC-2, etc. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1 /16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1 /2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps 4. AC Units 5. Convertors 6. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 7. Exhaust and Return Air Fans 8. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items 1.34 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's "^ representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. 1.35 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. B. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. 8. Parts list for all items. 9. Name and address of each vendor. 1.36 GUARANTEE A. Unless a longer period is specified elsewhere, the contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. r-e 99073 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 11 06/01 P" 1.37 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: 1. Accurate "as built" drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. — 5. Test and Balance Report. 1.38 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION A. Before calling for the final inspection, the Contractor under each Division shall carefully inspect his work to be sure it is complete and according to plans and specifications. END OF SECTION 99073 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 12 06/01 M SECTION 15300 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.4 INSPECTION A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. 1.5 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE A. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A74, Class SV Push On Gaskets for C.I. Soil Pipe ASTM C564 Caulked Joints for C.I. Soil Pipe Fed. Spec. HH-P-1 17 Type II No Hub Joints ASTM D3183 Clay Tile Pipe and Fittings ASTM C700 Clay Tile Joints ASTM C425 Rubber Rings for A.C. Pipe ASTM D1869 99073 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 1 5300 - 1 06 /01 ABS Soil Pipe and Fittings ABS Soil Joints - Elastomeric PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings PVC Soil Fittings - Elastomeric Copper Tubing Wrought Copper Solder Fittings Cast Bronze Solder Fittings Steel Pipe Butt Weld Fittings Socket Weld Fittings Steel Flanges Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Cast Iron Water Pipe Cement Lining for C.I. Water Pipe Cast Iron Water Pipe Fittings, Lined Push -On Joints for C.I. Water Pipe Mechanical Joints for Water Pipe ASTM D2751 ASTM D2751 ASTM D3034, Type PSM Max. SDR = 35 ASTM D3212 ASTM B88 ANSI BI6.22 ANSI B16.18 ASTM A120, A53, A106 ANSI B16.9 ANSI B16.1 1 ANSI B16.5 ANSI B16.3 Fed. Spec. WW-P-501 E ANSI A21 .6 ANSI A21 .4 ANSI A21.10 and A21 .10a ANSI A21.1 1 ANSI A21.1 1 PVC Water Pipe ASTM D1584 Type 1120 Push On Joints for PVC Water Pipe ASTM D1585, AWWA C900 Asbestos Cement Water Pipe AWWA C400 Class 150 AC Water Pipe Fittings ANSI A21.10, 150 lb. AC Water Pipe Joints ASTM D1869 Flange Bolt, Sets ASME Pressure Piping C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Maloney. E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. F. Mechanical Couplings: Victaulic Style 77 2.2 VALVES A. General Service Valves: 3" and smaller, all bronze, screwed; 3-1 /2 and larger, flanged, iron body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos: Type Fluid Pressure Fluid Pressure Below 125 PSIG Above 125 PSIG Gate 3" and smaller 428 424 Gate 3-1 /2" and larger 465-1 /2 7-1/2 E Globe 3" and smaller 1 14-1 /2 P Globe 3-1 /2" and larger 351 21 E Angle 3" and smaller 2 16-1 /2 P Angle 3-1/2" and larger 353 23E 99073 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 2 06/01 r B. Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as recommended by the valve manufacturer. Provide extended stems for valves in insulated line, so that the handle clears the insulation and jacket. C. Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth, Hammond. D. Butterfly Valves: Ductile iron body, flanged or with drilled and tapped lugs, bronze discs, stainless steel shafts with bronze bushings, resilient EPDM seats and 0-rings, "Bubble Tight" shut-off at 150 psi pressure. On valves 4" and smaller, handle shall be infinite position with memory stops. On valves 6" and larger, provide geared operators. Norris, Keystone, Center Line, Demco or Crane valves are acceptable. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems so that the handle will clear the insulation and jacket. E. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and 0-rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Valve shall be three piece break away for in -line service. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Ring type two piece ball valves are not acceptable. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems to clear the insulation and jacket. 2.3 GAUGE COCKS AND GAUGES A. Where gauge connections are installed in insulated lines, install a ConBraCo No. 41-380 T-handle gauge cock on a nipple of sufficient length that the cock handle will be free of the pipe insulation, and position each cock in relation to surrounding piping and equipment so that the gauge may be easily read, and so that a gauge having a 6" diameter dial can be screwed into and out of the cock. B. Install gauge cocks at pumps as close to pump suction and discharge connections as possible. Where drilled and tapped gauge connections are provided in the pump casing by the manufacturer, use these tappings. C. Pressure Gauges: Phosphor bronze, seamless Bourdon spring type with phosphor bronze bushed rotary movement and link; 4-1 /2" dial, nickel plated ring, free standing cast aluminum case; equipped with micrometer adjustment pointer. Furnish each gauge with scale range suitable for the duty. D. Water Pressure Gauges: Equal to Weksler No. BA14-1 with cast aluminum case; Weksler, Weiss, and Trerice acceptable. 2.4 THERMOMETER WELLS A. Furnish and install brass or stainless steel closed separable thermometer wells for all thermometer and controller bulbs which are designated for liquid measurements. Whenever a thermometer or controller bulb is inserted in a pipe for either remote or local temperature indication or control, locate the thermometer well so that it will be completely surrounded by flowing fluid. Such thermometer locations as shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only -install thermometer wells for maximum effectiveness and in the case of locally indicating instruments, for easy readability. B. Test Wells: Test wells for use with etched stem thermometers shall be Bolton No. 615 brass, with a threaded brass plug and keeper chain. Install these test wells so that they can be filled with oil to facilitate temperature measurements. 2.5 MERCURIAL THERMOMETERS A. Industrial type with Cycolac plastic cases, glass fronts, 9" scale, adjustable straight or angle pattern as required for ready readability. Furnish thermometers with 2-1 /2" stem extensions where they are installed in insulated lines. Select scale ranges for maximum 99073 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 3 06/01 readability at the design temperature of the medium being measured. Thermometer equal to Weksler No. AA5H9. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Weksler, Trerice, Weiss, Moeller. 2.6 COMBINATION PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE PORT A. Furnish and install where indicated "Pete's Plug" a 1 /4" MPT fitting to receive either a temperature or pressure probe 1 /8" OD. Fitting shall be solid brass with valve core of neoprene fitted with cap with gasket. Furnish an extended stem as required to extend through pipe insulation where installed in insulated lines. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed, except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. 3.2 FLASHING A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof with sheet lead not less than 4 lbs. per square foot, built a minimum of 8" in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity. Flashing at roof drains shall be 36" square. 99073 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 4 06/01 I 3.3 PITCH PANS A. Small lines thru the roof shall be installed thru pitch pans. Pans shall be 18 gage galvanized, welded, 3" deep, 8" X 8" or larger, packed with lead wool and filled with pitch. 3.4 PIPE SLEEVES A. Generally where pipes pass through walls or floors except sewer pipes through floors on grade, pipe sleeves shall be used. The sizes of these sleeves shall be such as to permit readily the subsequent insertion of the pipes of the proper size. In the case of insulated lines, the diameter of the sleeves shall be approximately 1 /2 inch greater than the outside diameter of the insulation. B. The pipes passing through interior walls or floors shall pass through galvanized pipe sleeves. In walls, they shall finish flush with each finished surface. In pipe chases, they shall extend 1-1/2 inches above the floor slab. The annular space between the pipe and sleeve in floor penetrations and fire rated wall penetrations shall be fire -sealed with fire resistive material equal to Dow Corning Silicone RTV Foam Penetration Seal. C. The pipes passing through concrete beams or walls, and masonry exterior walls and through floors shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves. Weld at least four No. 4 rods to each pipe sleeve to serve as an anchor as directed by the Architect. After the pipes are installed, in the case of pipes sleeving through exterior beams or walls and floors on grade, the Contractor shall fill the annular space between the pipe and its sleeve with mechanical interlocking synthetic rubber link equal to Link Seal. Contractor shall coordinate sleeve size to insure a watertight joint. 3.5 ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES A. Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated. B. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls. 3.6 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS A. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non -corrosive paste flux of the proper type for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder (95% tin, 5% antimony) or 8ilvabrite 100 solder (95.5% tin, 4% copper, .5% silver composition) for all copper tubing. Under no circumstances will solder with any lead content be permitted on the jobsite. B. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1 /8" per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of welding by chipping or grinding before depositing the next successive bead of welding. 99073 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 5 06/01 lZ C. Mechanical Couplings: 1. Mechanical couplings and fittings shall be used to connect mechanical equipment and piping systems where specified. Couplings shall be equal to Victaulic Style 77 with housing fabricated in two or more parts of malleable iron castings, in accordance with Federal Specification AA-1-666C Grade 11. Couplings gasket shall be equal to Victaulic Grade "H" molded synthetic rubber, per ASTM D-735-61, Grade No. R615BZ. Coupling bolts shall be oval neck track head type with hexagonal heavy nuts, per ASTM-A-183-60. 2. All pipe fittings used with couplings shall be fabricated of malleable iron castings in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-1-66C Grade 11. Where malleable fitting pattern is not available, fittings fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe or standard wall seamless welding fittings with grooved ends may be used. 3. Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with cup grease or graphite paste to facilitate installation. 4. Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications contained in the latest published literature. D. Testing: 1. The Contractor shall have a minimum of 10 percent of all welds made by each welder examined and inspected by radiography. If a faulty weld is discovered, the Contractor shall perform radiographic inspection on all welds made by that welder. Any faulty welds shall be repaired and reinspected at the Contractor's expense. 2. The system shall be hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times the design pressure, specified in Chapter VI ASME Code B31.1-1986 for Power Piping, and carefully checked for leaks. The design pressure is 400 psig. After leaks are repaired, retest system; repeat repair and test until proved tight. Equipment shall be isolated from hydrostatic testing of piping. 3. Welds which cannot be hydrostatically tested, e.g., branch connections made to existing piping, shall be radiographed per Chapter VI, ASME Code B31.1-1986 at Contractor's expense. The Owner at his option may allow visual inspection of these welds in lieu of radiographs. 3.7 REVISIONS AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Where conflicts occur between the new work and the existing piping systems which cannot be resolved, the Contractor shall relocate the existing piping system. Relocated positions of piping shall be tested for new work. All piping systems shall be free from leaks. 3.8 REPAIR OF LEAKS A. All leaks in piping systems shall be corrected as follows: 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. Repair leaks in screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. 3. Leaks in caulked joints may be stopped by additional caulking of the joint; but if that fails, remake the joint. 4. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld completely through the base metal and grind smooth. Re -weld, accomplishing 100% penetration of the base metal. The repair weld should in no case be less than 4" in length. B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. 99073 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 6 06/01 3.9 HANDLING OF MATERIAL A. Hauling: All materials furnished by the Contractor shall be delivered and distributed at the site by the Contractor. B. Loading and Unloading: Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be loaded or unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be own skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. Each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed. No material shall be unloaded where it will block any road, drive, building entrance, or walkway or where it will be a hazard to safe vehicular or pedestrian traffic. C. Care of Pipe Coating and Lining: Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining shall not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the PM repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense. If satisfactory repair cannot be made, the Contractor shall replace the damaged pipe. 3.10 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems ,.•e plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. B. Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not interfere with existing obstructions. END OF SECTION 99073 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 7 06/01 No Text i SECTION 15310 PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. z ,a 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories" A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Except as otherwise specified or noted on the drawings, piping inside of, under and within 10'0" of the building or other structures shall be bell and spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, each heavily coated at the factory with asphaltum or coal tar pitch and each having the manufacturer's mark or name and the date of manufacture cast on it. Type "L" copper in sizes up to 2" may be used where space is restricted. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited. B. Sanitary Vent Lines: Vents in the sanitary system shall be service weight cast iron bell and spigot pipe and fittings for all lines 2" and larger and standard weight galvanized steel, Type L or heavier weight copper, red brass, or lead for lines smaller than 2" except that the same class of material shall be used throughout, insofar as practicable. C.I. joints may be caulked or push -on. Above grade, no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited. C. Domestic Water Lines (Hot, Cold and Recirculating): All water lines underground or under slabs on grade shall be of Type K hard drawn copper tubing. All interior water lines shall be Type L hard drawn copper tubing. Where connections are made between copper tubing and cast iron pipe, use adapters. Copper tubing shall be assembled using solder -joint fittings. No lead solder will be permitted. All flanges shall be 150 psig rated. D. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. ` 99073 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 1 5310 - 1 06/01 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 ISOLATION VALVES A. The water supplies to each group of fixtures shall have an isolating valve in each line serving the riser. Where these valves are not accessible thru removable ceilings or otherwise, provide access doors in the ceiling or chase. 3.2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Refer to PIPING AND ACCESSORIES for requirements for installing pipes. In addition, the following specifications shall apply. 1. Drain Lines and Sanitary Waste: Grade down toward the sewer connection at a uniform slope of 1 /4" per foot to serve individual fixtures or not less than 1 /8" per foot to serve multiple stacks or outlets. Slope shall be greater where possible and shall never be less than required to produce a flow velocity of 2 feet per second. 2. Vents: Grade up to the vent thru the roof. Terminate not less than 10" above the " roof. 3. Water Lines: Grade to established low points and provide valved drains to completely drain the system. -_ 4. Secure and anchor piping in plumbing chases such that there is no movement of flush valves, stops, etc. at fixture rough -ins. 3.3 TESTING A. Test all pipes before they are concealed in furrings or chases, insulated, painted, or otherwise covered up or rendered inaccessible. Accomplish testing by sections of lines — or systems, as required by conditions during construction. Clean all piping and equipment before testing. B. Domestic Water Lines Interior: Test for 6 hours at 150 psig. There shall be no leaks whatsoever. C. Interior Soil, Waste and Vent Lines: Drainage and venting system piping shall be tested with water before the fixtures are installed. Water test shall be applied to the drainage and venting system either in its entirety or in sections. If the entire system is tested, all — openings in the pipes shall be tightly closed except the highest opening and the system shall be filled with water to the point of overflow. If the system is tested in sections, each opening except the highest opening of the section under test shall be tightly _ plugged, and each section shall be filled with water and tested with at least a 10 foot head of water. The water shall be kept in the system, or in the portion under test, for at least 30 minutes before the inspection starts. The system shall then be tight at all joints. Water shall not drop more than 1 " in 8 hours. 3.4 DISINFECTING A. After cleaning, flushing and testing, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials necessary for the disinfection of all domestic pipe lines which shall be disinfected by the application of a chlorinating agent. The chlorinating agent may be a liquid chlorine, liquid chlorine gas water mixture, or a calcium hypochlorite solution, which shall be fed into the lines through a suitable solution feed device. B. The chlorinating agent shall be applied at or near the point from which the line is being filled and through a corporation stop or other approved connection inserted in the horizontal axis of the newly laid pipe. The water being used to fill the line shall be controlled to flow into the section to be disinfected very slowly. 99073 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15310 - 2 06101 ,® r-� C. The chlorine dose applied to the water entering the lines shall be at least 40 to 60 parts per million. The treated water shall be retained in the pipe lines for a period of not less ,... than 24 hours. At the end of the 24 hour retention period the chlorine residual shall be at least 20 ppm. All treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the lines until the replacement water in the lines has a chlorine residual of not more than 0.2 parts per million. END OF SECTION i :: POIN i:.. r 99073 PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15310 - 3 06/01 ate. SECTION 15330 CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the chilled and heating water systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. B. Install chilled and heating water circulating piping complete and connect to coils, pumps, and other equipment. Include drain lines where shown or required. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". A. Chilled and Heating Water Lines: Standard weight black steel. Use Victaulic couplings on lines 4" and larger. Weld smaller lines. Lines 2-1 /2" and smaller shall be type L copper with solder joint fittings. B. Drain Lines: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe assembled with 150 pound malleable iron, banded pattern, screwed fittings or, at the Contractor's option may be type L hard copper assembled with wrought copper solder joint fittings. Do not mix the two materials. C. Automatic Air Vents: ASME labeled; equal to Crane No. 976. Crane and Sarco acceptable. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS A. Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air locks and traps. Grade the system downward to the circulating pumps with valved drain connections from the low points to floor drains. Where additional low points are !"` unavoidable, provide service drains to permit the complete drainage of the system. B. Provide automatic air vents at all high points of the system. Where horizontal mains change size, employ eccentric reducing couplings so installed as to keep the tops of coupled pipes on the same level. C. Install drains from each pump base and from each air unit pan to the nearest floor drain in each case. Provide any other drain lines indicated on the drawings or required. D. Install manual valves where required to segregate individual items of equipment or sections of circulating systems or where indicated on the drawings or required. �1 99073 CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS 15330 - 1 3.2 CLEANING A. Chilled Water System: Fill the system with a solution consisting of either one pound of caustic soda or three pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water. Eliminate all air and circulate this solution for 48 hours. Drain the system and thoroughly flush it with fresh water. Clean out all strainers. Refill the system with fresh tl` water. B. Heating Water System: Same as chilled water system, except heat the solution. 3.3 TESTING A. Before insulating or concealing any lines, test all piping. Test all lines at 150% of the system working pressure or 100 psig whichever is greater, for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. END OF SECTION 99073 CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS 15330 - 2 SECTION 15390 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION PART1 GENERAL 1 .1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section applies to piping systems used to transport gases, liquids or semi -liquids. The term "piping systems", includes pipes, fittings, valves and pipe coverings located either inside or outside the buildings. This identification scheme does not apply to piping systems buried in the ground. !00 1.4 REFERENCES A. Occupational Safety and Health Standards - Part 1910.144. B. Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems - ANSI A 13.1 C. Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards - ANSI 253.1 1.5 METHOD OF IDENTIFICATION A. The primary identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. B. This identifying mark shall be supplemented by the use of a color code which will indicate the nature of the material carried in the system. Piping systems shall be placed, by the nature of their contents, in one of the basic groups listed below. Each group is assigned a predominant color range as noted. C. The entire exposed length of the piping system shall be painted by its proper color code to identify the system. Markers shall be painted on using stencils. Specialties shall be painted as specified for piping. D. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Markers on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and ducts and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers similarly color coded and sized. ! 99073 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION 15390 - 1 06/01 E. Size of Identification: Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering -- Letters (" Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 8 to 10 2-1/2 Over 10 3-1/2 - F. Colors: Exact colors shall conform to Owners Piping Identification Code. All numbers are PITTSBURGH: Piping Color Steam - 100 PSI Safety Yellow - 6-264 Steam - 40 PSI Safety Yellow - 6-264 Steam - 15 PSI Safety Yellow - 6-264 Condensate - High Pressure Sunset Orange - 54-124 �. Condensate - Low Pressure Sunset Orange - 54-124 Condensate - Pump Return Sunset Orange - 54-124 Ducts - Supply and Return Safety Orange - 6-259 Hot and Chilled Water Supply & Return Spanish Blue - 1-346 Waste and Vent Flat Black - 54-198 Cold Water Vista Green - 6-256 Hot Water Rose Coral - 15P-27 Fire Lines & Gas (Nat.) Safety Red - 6-261 -� Air Lines Autumn Brown - 54-126 Equipment Pumps H & CH Water Seal Brown - 1-344 Converter Rose Coral - 15P-27 A.H. Unit, Generator Touch up as required H.W. Storage Tank Rose Coral - 15 P 27 Sump Pump, Water Pumps Safety Blue - 6-262 - Controls Equipment Powder Blue - 4P-55 Copper Pipe Polish and lacquer Electrical Materials Grey 99073 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION 15390 - 2 06/01 W Vacuum Lines Reef Brown - 95-6 (Color Guild) Gas (Natural) Safety Red - 6-261 1.6 IDENTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall provide and install, on each valve and cock which he installs, a Seton P-250 tag with depressed, black filled numbers and letters identifying the service by letters and the number of the valve. Attach these to the handles of the valves and cocks using meter seals, approved brass S hooks, or heavy copper clad annealed iron wire. B. Furnish and install where directed a chart or directory listing the complete identification of every valve and cock. This chart shall designate class of service, and shall itemize the valve or cock identified, shall list its exact location, shall give its number, and shall be neatly typed and mounted under a glass pane in a suitable frame. These charts shall, in addition, list the various colors identifying the piping. 1.7 MARKING ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Lay -in Ceiling Panels: Use color coded thumb tacks neatly aligned in one corner of the panel to identify valves, fire dampers, smoke dampers, etc. The color code shall conform to the piping identification color code for valve access. The color shall be red for fire and smoke dampers. B. Stencil 1 /2" high letters on concealed access doors to identify fire and smoke dampers. 1.8 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For example, pumps will be identified as P-1, P-2, P-3, etc.; exhaust fans will be EF-1, EF-2, etc.; AC Units will be AC-1, AC-2, etc. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1 /16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1 /2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps 4. AC Units 5. Convertors 6. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 7. Exhaust and Return Air Fans 8. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items END OF SECTION 99073 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION 06/01 15390 - 3 SECTION 15400 AIR DISTRIBUTION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of apparatus casing, ductwork, plenums, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, relief air vents, curbs and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. B. In addition, connect all air conditioning units, automatic dampers, filters and all other materials and install (and/or cooperate in the installation with other trades) those various items of equipment and materials. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ducts insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. B. Duct construction details shall conform to "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", 1st Edition, (1985) published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). Refer to the fan schedules (TSP) for system pressures. Construction shall be suitable for actual duct system pressures. C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1 /2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of 1 " in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1 " in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of 1 " in 4" where conditions necessitate. E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where 99073 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 1 06/01 obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. a 2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION TEST A. A trial leak test, as specified herein, shall be made after installation of the first section of each type of ductwork to demonstrate adequacy of the construction details. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Architect. B. Each test section shall incorporate at least five transverse joints and all typical fittings. C. Drawings showing all construction details of test sections, test procedures and instrumentation, and test results shall be submitted for record purposes. No additional ductwork shall be installed until the trial test installation described above has been approved. D. Low pressure duct shall be tested at 3 "w.c. Construction of low pressure systems shall be inherently airtight and leakage shall be of a sufficiently low magnitude as to be inaudible in quiet ambient and not detectable by sense of feel. 2.3 DUCT SEALER A. All supply air ductwork from the air unit to the terminal units shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum of 48 hours before pressurizing system. 2.4 DUCT LINER A. For use in return transfer ducts and sound boots only. B. The listed ducts shall be lined to a thickness of 2" with Johns -Manville "Permacote Linacoustic" mat faced duct liner, or equal duct liner coated with immobilized antimicrobial impregnated acrylic surface coating on one side. C. Duct liner shall have an average thermal conductivity of .25 btu-in./sq. ft.-degree F. at a mean temperature of 75 F. D. Duct liner shall comply with ASTM C1071 with an NRC not less than 0.70 as tested per ASTM C423. E. The duct liner shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations with the coated side away from the metal, using weld pins or adhesive Tuffbond and adhesive type metal clips, Gemco, or equal, of the type which do not protrude through the duct. The size of the ducts indicated are actual internal sizes and the sheet metal sizes shall be 4" greater in both dimensions to accommodate the lining. No voids are permitted. F. Use 100% adhesive coverage and clips at the rate as specified by SMACNA. 2.5 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTS A. This ductwork shall be defined as that between the discharge of the supply fan and pressure reducing terminal boxes. This work shall be provided and installed as shown and as specified hereinafter. B. This ductwork shall be round in cross-section, flat oval or rectangular as shown on the drawings. It shall be constructed according to the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. Duct construction details shall be in accordance with the "High Pressure Duct Standard, 3rd Edition", published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning 99073 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 2 06/01 W 95 P•* tr [7 E. F. G. H. Contractors National Association Inc. except as may be abridged herein. 6" pressure class. All job -constructed ducts shall be made with longitudinal joints butted and welded. Round ducts 48" in diameter and smaller and all flat oval ducts shall be factory fabricated spirally wound conduit made from zinc coated steel strips. All such ducts shall be delivered in standard lengths and shall be cut to proper length at the site by power saw to insure proper fit and square alignment. Fittings used on round or flat oval ducts shall be shop fabricated by welding. Changes in direction shall be made with mitered fittings of at least 3 sections; 90 degree elbows shall contain not less than five sections. Branch takeoffs shall be at 45 degree, except where indicated on the drawings they may be 90 degree conical taps. The run of a conical take -off shall be not less than the diameter of the branch which it serves. This contractor shall furnish for review drawings of fittings which he proposes to use and shall not proceed with fabrication until review by the Architect. A high degree of dimensional accuracy is required in both conduit and fittings in order that the installation may be strong, rigid, and within allowable limits of air leakage. Inside diameter of conduits when checked with ring gages shall show a variation from nominal diameter of not more than 0.030". Fittings shall be provided with male connections and, when checked with ring gages, shall show a variation from nominal outside diameter of not more than 0.015 inch. Transitions shall be all welded construction. In any required rectangular ells, provide Airsan "Acoustiturn" double thick acoustical turning vanes. All high pressure ducts having a dimension of 36" or greater shall be assembled using gasketed companion flanges. All other joints between conduits and between conduits and fittings shall be made with "Hardcast" cement reinforced with self -tapping drill screws. Conduits shall be joined with couplings. Adjoining surfaces of fitting or coupling and conduit at each joint shall be thoroughly cleaned, and after receiving a uniform coat of cement shall be pressed together. ,Joints so formed shall be further strengthened by the use of hex head No. 7x12 self -tapping drill screws installed with a screw gun. Screws shall be equally spaced around the circumference and centered longitudinally on the joint. Use three screws per joint on conduit with diameters of 3" through 8" and space screws approximately 6" apart on conduit with diameters of 9" and over. Then seal the joint with "Hardcast" assembled using manufacturer's instructions. It is essential that all high velocity ductwork be practically air tight. After erection in place, and before being insulated or connected to the air distribution units, each high velocity duct system shall be tested for leaks. For the test, each system shall be capped at all openings. Pressure test according to the SMACNA procedure, admitting air thru a precision orifice and using pressure taps and a manometer. Under this test there shall be no whistling leaks and the pressure drop across the orifice shall not exceed the pressure drop corresponding to 1 % air loss according to SMACNA Tables of the design air quantity in that branch. 2.6 AIR CONTROL DEVICES A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the air flow in the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a splitter damper shall be installed at each point where a branch is taken off and additional volume dampers shall be installed where shown or required to achieve the final air balance. B. Splitter dampers and volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances. The length of any splitter damper blade shall be 1-1/2 times the width of the smaller split in the duct, but shall be not less than 12". Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in 99073 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 3 06101 cases where neither dimension of the damper exceed 18". The metal used shall match that of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and bearings as required to resist corrosion. C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 24", volume dampers shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single point. They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish. Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. Blades shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic dampers shall be fitted with felts to insure tight closure. Felts shall be both glued and riveted to the damper blades. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity. D. Each splitter or volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted with an adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 896 concealed air split regulators. On exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts. E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off brackets. _ 2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible ducts shall be used for connecting air terminal devices. Generally flex duct shall not exceed 3'0" in length or have more than 90 degree of bend. Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4 inch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories under their UL-181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M-KC for high pressure and Thermaflex M-KE for low pressure application. 2.8 ROUND DUCT TAPS A. All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or _ fiberglass ductboard as applicable. Provide each with a factory installed balancing damper, positive locking nut and air scoop. 2.9 FIRE DAMPERS A. Weighted fire dampers having bronze bearings and held open by fusible links shall be constructed and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association as published in NFPA Bulletin 90A and applicable ordinances and the Building Code. All fire dampers shall have Underwriters' Laboratory labels. B. Specifically, fire dampers shall be provided at the points indicated on the drawings, where a duct penetrates a fire rated partition and where a duct penetrates the roof, ceiling, floor or other areas requiring a fire rated separation. They shall also be installed at any other location as required by applicable codes. Provide access panels in the duct and access doors in the ceiling or wall to service and test the damper. Access doors with vision panes shall be furnished with wire glass. 99073 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 4 06/01 > l rw C. Furnish fire dampers with fusible links rated for 160 degrees F unless indicated otherwise. Fire dampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel and rated at 1-1/2 hours for partitions and floors rated up to 2 hours, and 3 hour rating for use in partitions and floors rated up to 4 hours unless noted otherwise. Blades shall be of the interlocking type, those in high pressure duct shall be 100% free area and out of the air stream. Fire dampers shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical mounting as s required and shall be furnished with factory fabricated sleeve minimum of two gauges heavier than connecting ductwork. D. Fire dampers in low pressure duct shall be equal to Action Air, Inc. Model 150A. Fire dampers in ceiling air distribution outlets shall be equal to Action Air, Inc. Model 400. 2.10 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Furnish and install a combination fire/smoke damper in all ducts penetrating fire/smoke partitions. Each combination fire and smoke 1 damper shall meet all requirements specified elsewhere for fire dampers and additionally shall include an operating shaft which, when rotated 90 degrees, causes damper to operate between closed and open. Operating shaft and damper combination shall be suitable for linking to and operation by a pneumatic damper operator. Combination fire/smoke dampers shall be Ruskin type ,.. FSD-36, Class 11, 10 CFM/SF leakage @ 1 "SP for low pressure applications and Ruskin type FSD-60, Class I, airfoil blade, 4 CFM/SF @ 1 "SP for high pressure applications. B. Each combination fire/smoke damper shall be furnished complete with factory sleeve and pneumatic damper operator factory installed on exterior of sleeve and properly linked to damper operating shaft. Actuator shall be of the spring return fail closed type that will close damper upon power interruption. Damper operators shall be UL listed as fire damper operators and bar the UL label for such. Blade edge seals shall be silicone rya rubber and galvanized steel mechanically locked into blade edge (adhesive or clip -on seals not acceptable). C. The smoke damper shall close on a signal from the fire alarm system or from the operator of a smoke detector. D. Provide access doors with ductports in the duct and a ceiling access door if necessary r ' for servicing the damper and actuator. !"- 2.11 ACCESS PANEL A. Access doors of sufficient size shall be installed in ducts to permit servicing of contained equipment including fire extinguishing equipment, dampers, etc. Where those panels are in insulated ducts, they shall be double wall panels with material to match the lining and of the same thickness. In uninsulated ducts they shall be single wall construction. All access panels shall have No. 310 Ventlock catches and pulls, No. 260 hinges and No. 390 gaskets. B. Where access panels are not exposed or readily accessible above removable ceilings, provide access doors in the general construction. 2.12 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose. Refer to the tabulation on the drawings for types, sizes and accessories. B. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory finished in OFF-WHITE. Door grilles shall be factory finished in baked enamel medium birch tan. C. All other grilles and registers shall be factory primed and spray painted 2 coats on the job. D. All grilles and registers shall be installed with tamperproof screws and shall be secured to the duct with a minimum of four screws. 99073 06/01 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 5 E. Where perforated supply grilles are scheduled, they shall be of the type with adjustable curved blades in the neck of the diffusers. Other types are not acceptable. F. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Barber Colman, Titus, Tuttle and Bailey, Lo Metal -Aire or Krueger will be acceptable. 2.13 SERIES FAN POWER HYDRONIC HEAT A. Furnish and install TITUS Model PTQS constant volume series fan powered terminals of the sizes and capacities shown on the plans. Space limitations shall be reviewed carefully to ensure that all terminals will fit the available space. B. Terminals should be certified under the ARI Standard 880-89 Certification Program and carry the ARI Seal. Noncertified terminals may be submitted after testing at an independent testing laboratory under conditions selected by the engineer in full compliance with ARI Standard 880-89. These tests must be witnessed by the engineering consultant with all costs to be borne by the terminal manufacturer. Testing does not ensure acceptance. C. The terminal shall be designed, built, and tested as a single unit including motor and fan assembly, primary air damper assembly, water or electric heating coils, and accessories as shipped. Unit shall ship as a complete assembly requiring no field assembly (including accessories). All electrical components shall be UL listed and installed in accordance with the National Electric Code. Electrical connection shall be single point. All electrical components, including low voltage controls, shall be mounted in sheet metal control enclosures. The entire terminal shall be ETL or UL listed as a complete assembly. D. The terminal casing shall be minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel, internally lined with dual density glass fiber insulation which complies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. Any exposed insulation edges shall be coated with NFPA 90A approved sealant to prevent entertainment of fibers in the airstream. The terminal shall have a round duct collar for the primary air connection and a rectangular discharge suitable for flanged duct connection. The casing shall be designed for hanging by sheet metal straps. E. The terminal casing shall have a bottom access panel which allows removal of fan and servicing of terminal without disturbing duct connections. F. The fan shall be constructed of steel and have a forward curved, dynamically balanced wheel with direct drive motor. The motor shall be suitable for 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase power. The motor shall be of energy efficient design, permanent split capacitor type, with integral thermal overload protection and permanently lubricated bearings, and be specifically designed for use with an SCR for fan speed adjustment. Fan assembly shall include an anti -backward rotation design, torsion -flex tuned spring steel suspension, and isolation between motor and fan housing. G. The terminals shall utilize a manual SCR, which allows continuously adjustable fan speed from maximum to minimum as a means of setting fan airflow. Setting fan airflow with an device that raises the pressure across the fan to reduce airflow is not acceptable. The speed control shall incorporate a minimum voltage stop to preclude motor under voltage operation. H. The primary air damper assembly shall be heavy gauge steel with solid shaft rotating in Delrin or bronze oilite self-lubricating bearings. Nylon bearings are not acceptable. Shaft shall be clearly marked on the end to indicate damper position. Stickers or other removable markings are not acceptable. The damper shall incorporate a mechanical stop to prevent overstroking, and a synthetic seal to limit close -off leakage to the maximum values shown in Table B. I. The primary air damper assembly shall be heavy gauge steel with solid shaft rotating in J Delrin or bronze oilite self-lubricating bearings. Nylon bearings are not acceptable. R Damper leakage shall not exceed 5% of the manufacturer's scheduled maximum fan capacity at 1 " wg. inlet static pressure. 99073 AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 6 06/01 J. Sound ratings for the terminals shall not exceed 30 NC at 0.25 inlet static pressure, and discharge static pressure of 0.3". Sound performance shall be ARI certified. Radiated Path Attenuation 2 3 4 5 6 7 Environmental Effect 3 2 1 1 1 1 Ceiling Effect 9 10 12 14 15 15 i Room Effect 9 10 11 12 13 14 Total dB Reduction 9 10 11 12 13 14 Discharge Path Attenuation 2 3 4 5 6 7 Environmental Effect 3 2 1 1 1 1 ' End Reflection 11 6 2 0 0 0 Duct Lining 1 3 8 21 20 12 5'8" Flex Duct 6 10 17 19 19 12 Room Effect 9 10 11 12 13 14 Total dB Reduction 30 31 39 53 53 39 The radiated and discharge path attenuation function for the specified NC shall be based upon factors found in ARI Standard 885-90 and shown in the tables above. No additional attenuation factors shall be deducted from the sound power. �v K. Sound attenuators required to achieve the previously specified sound criteria are acceptable. The cost of field assembled or field installed sound attenuators shall be borne by the terminal manufacturer. L. Hot Water Heating Coils: Hot water heating coils shall be enclosed in a minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel casing with flanged construction for attachment to metal ductwork. Coils shall be factory installed on the terminals. Fins shall be rippled and corrugated heavy gauge aluminum, mechanically bonded to tubes. Tubes shall be copper with minimum wall thickness of .016", with male solder header connections. Coils shall be leak tested to 300 psi, with minimum burst pressure of 2000 psi at ambient temperature. Number of coil rows and circuits shall be selected to provide performance as required per the plans. Coil performance data shall be based on tests r-. run in accordance with ARI Standard 410. M. Install units so that complete access to box is possible. Provide access doors that may be removed from the bottom, with the lay -in ceiling 6" below the box. 99073 06/01 END OF SECTION AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 7 17 SECTION 15500 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall furnish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modern will be considered. MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. Hanger Copper Tubing 4" and Larger 364 copper plated Hanger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller 361 copper plated -. Hanger Steel Lines 3" and smaller 215 or 199 Hanger Steel lines 4" and larger 239 Hanger Outside Insulation -all lines 239 Hanger Cast Iron Lines 239 Hanger Plastic Pipe 108 + 109 e Hanger Refrigerant Pipe 102 Hanger Glass Pipe 375 Wall Bracket All 150, 151, or 155 Saddles Steel Lines On Rollers 71, 1710, 1712, 172, 173 Conc. Inserts New Construction 185 Rollers Steel Piping 161, 272 Pipe Clamps 2" and Smaller 304 Pipe Clamps 3" and Larger 241 Pipe Rest All 295 or 291 Exp Shield Concrete 374 Beam Clamps All 249, 254, 255, 282, 280 Adjuster All 2381 99073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15500 - 1 06 /01 A:. 2.2 HANGER RODS A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter 3/8" 1/2" 5/8" 3/4" 2.3 HANGER SPACING Size of Steel Pipe or Copper Tube Supported 2-1/2" and smaller 3" and 4" 5" through 8" 10" and larger Size of Cast Iron Pipe Supported 3" and smaller 4" through 6" 8" through 10" 12" and larger A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or the type of pipe involved or required by code. Size of Line 3/4" and smaller 1 " through 1-1 /2" 2" and larger All cast iron lines PART 3 EXECUTION Hanger Spacing in Feet 5 7 10 5 (Minimum two per joint) 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10'0" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. F. Where pipes or equipment are suspended under existing concrete construction, drill and use Grinnell Fig. 117 expansion case or Phillips concrete fasteners in sizes not 99073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 1 5500 - 2 06/01 exceeding 1 /2" and for loads of 200 Ibs or less. For larger rods or loads above 200 lbs drill through the beam above the bottom steel and bolt a Grinnell Fig. 202 bracket to the side of the beam for support. Size brackets per manufacturer's recommendations. Use pipe stands where required. f G. Where multiple lines are run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed for sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. 3.2 DUCT HANGERS A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. END OF SECTION a� 99073 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 06/01 15500 - 3 0 SECTION 15600 INSULATION PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as - described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom, All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically excepted. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, b- including those provided by equipment manufacturers. - B. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein. C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 2.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white kraft � paper and .001 inch thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber fabric between the foil and the paper. The foil and paper shall be adhered with a flame resistant latex adhesive. B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with one coat insulating cement equal to OC-110 built up to the thickness of the adjoining pipe covering and vapor seal with two 1 /8 inch wet coats of vapor barrier mastic equal to Benjamin Foster No. 65-07 reinforced with glass fabric extending 2" onto the adjacent insulation. 99073 INSULATION 15600 - 1 06/01 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. 3.2 APPLICATION OF INSULATION A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. B. On glass fiber pipe covering with factory -applied vapor -barrier jacket, lap the jacket on the longitudinal seams and seal with vapor barrier lap adhesive equal to Benjamin Foster 82-07 or use self sealing lap. Tightly butt the ends and cover butt joints with a 4" wide band of vapor barrier jacket secured with the same adhesive. 3.3 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. In the following, the word "exposed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in any room above the lowest floor in any building unit, exterior to the building and above ground, and/or in equipment rooms; the word "concealed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in other underfloor areas, ceiling spaces furrings and chases. B. Also included in this section is the requirement for patching and repair of existing insulation where new connections are made. 1. Chilled Water Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied all purpose vapor barrier jacket equal to Manville "Micro-Lok APT 850". Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick. Insulate valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. 2. Heating Water Supply and Return Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied all purpose vapor barrier jacket equal to Manville "Micro-Lok APT 650". Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick. Insulate valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. 3. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Armaflex. Insulation may be slit flange type or threaded on during fabrication. 4. High Pressure Ducts: a. Insulate the round cold high pressure ducts with 0.75 lb. density, 2" thick Manville "Microlite R Series" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket. b. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with two coats of Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. Embed three inch wide Glassfab membrane in adhesive between coats. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three inch 99073 INSULATION 15600 - 2 06/01 r wide facing strip. Instal with not more than 25% compression in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Note that double wall duct need not be insulated. 5. Ducts — Note that sound boots and return transfer ducts shall be lined. a. Insulate the supply, return and fresh air ducts with 0.75 lb. density, 2" thick Manville "Microlite R Series" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket. b. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Except on ducts handling warm air only, seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with two coats of Benjamin Foster 30-35 adhesive. Embed three inch wide Glassfab membrane in adhesive between coats. Install with not more than 25% compression in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. c. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three inch wide facing strip. d. Ducts handling warm air only need not be vapor sealed. END OF SECTION 99073 INSULATION 15600 - 3 06/01 F SECTION 15700 EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with the applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data and shop drawings on all items specified. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service ,.� necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number `~ - of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified r.a item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract. and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1 . Space requirements - 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - no. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality 6. Quantity p PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS 4-4 A. Motors shall be furnished for all motor driven equipment. Motors with special operating conditions such as multiple speed or in hazardous locations shall be as specified under the equipment served. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts H shall conform to the following requirements: 1. Less than 1 /6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 99073 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 1 s� 06/01 2. Fractional larger than 1 /6 HP: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 3. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. 4. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1 .15. Power factor shall be 85% or greater. Motors shall be equal to Gould E-Plus. 2.2 MOTOR STARTERS B. The Division 15 Contractor shall furnish all motor starters (controllers) and control equipment for equipment specified under Division 15. The Contractor under this section of the specifications shall be responsible for coordinating starter sizes, characteristics, heater element sizes and all other details. C. All individual starters shall be the product of a single manufacturer and submitted for review at the same time. D. Where starters are specified with items of equipment, the starters shall be factory mounted and wired. E. Magnetic Starters (Full Voltage): Starters shall be individual units, combination starter/molded case circuit breaker units, combination starter/fused disconnect switch units or combination starter/unfused disconnect switch units unless otherwise indicated. F. Units shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse, Federal or Gould manufacture with the proper enclosures. G. Provide pilot lights and either pushbutton stations or hand -off -automatic switches as required for the control of each item of equipment. Generally, pushbutton stations shall be used only where no interlock or remote functions are specified. Control devices shall be in the starter cover unless otherwise indicated. H. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. I. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. J. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with 120 volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded. K. Manual Starters: Where manual starters are indicated, they shall consist of a horsepower rated on -off switch, or hand -off -auto switch with a pilot light and overload element(s) in the same enclosure. Where the starter is installed in public areas, it shall be in a recessed box with a stainless steel coverplate. 2.3 INDOOR MOUNTED AIR HANDLERS A. General: 1. Furnish and install York AirPak horizontal draw-thru, double wall air handling unit. All internal components specified in the air handling unit schedule shall be factory furnished and installed. Unit shall be completely factory assembled. The unit cooling capacity, ventilating capacity and performance shall meet or exceed that shown on the schedule. 2. All necessary tags and decals to aid in the service or indicate caution areas shall be provided. Electrical wiring diagrams shall be attached to the control panel access door. Installation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with each unit. 3. Units shall ship in three (3) pieces. Lifting lugs shall be supplied on each side of the split to facilitate rigging and joining of segments. 99073 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 2 06/01 B. Base and Frame: The entire unit shall be provided with a full-length, continuous, base rail channel. Base rail shall be formed of a minimum of 12 gage galvanized steel. The base rail shall have a minimum height of 8 inches. All major components shall be supported from the base. Integral lifting lugs shall be provided. C. Unit Casing: 1. The unit shall have a frame construction consisting of cast corner pieces and galvanized steel vertical and horizontal structural members. The frame shall be constructed to permit complete removal of the wall and roof panels without affecting the structural integrity of the unit. .» 2. All segments shall be double wall and shall be constructed of G90 mill galvanized sheet steel, formed and reinforced to provide a rigid assembly. The exterior casing shall be constructed of a minimum 18 gage galvanized steel. The interior lining shall be a solid lining of a minimum of 20 gage. Fan section shall be perforated lining of a minimum of 18 gage galvanized steel or aluminum. D. Removable Panels: 1. All wall and roof panels shall be completely removable for unit access and removal of components. All access panels must be removable without affecting the structural integrity of the unit. 2. All panels shall be completely gasketed with a minimum of 1 /4" thick and 3/4" wide .�» closed cell neoprene. E. Access Doors: 1. Double wall access doors shall be provided in the fan, access and filter section on the drive side of the unit. Access section shall require access doors on both sides of ", the unit. 2. Doors shall be of similar thickness and construction as the wall panels. A 3/8" bulb -type gasket shall be provided around the entire door perimeter. Industrial style hinges shall permit a complete 180-degree door swing. F. Fan Segments: 1. The supply air fan segment shall be equipped with double width double inlet centrifugal airfoil type wheel and shall be Class 11 as required for stable operation. 2. Fan and unit performance shall be rated and certified in accordance with ARI Standard 430. 3. All airfoil fans shall bear the AMCA Seal. Airfoil fan performance shall be based on tests made in accordance with AMCA standards 210 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA certified ratings program for air and sound. In addition, all airfoil wheels shall comply with AMCA standard 99-2408-69 and 99-2401-82. 4. After the pre -balanced fan is installed in the air handler, the entire fan section shall be run -balanced at the specified speed to insure smooth and trouble -free operation. - The run balance shall include filter in horizontal and vertical planes and filter out balancing in all three (3) planes, on both sides of the fan assembly at the bearings. 5. Fan bearings shall be self -aligning; pillow block or flanged type regreaseable ball bearings and shall be designed for an average life (1-50) of at least 200,000 hours. G. Fan Drives: Fan drives shall be selected for a 1.5 service factor and multiple anti -static belts shall be furnished. H. Fan and Fan Motor Isolation: Fan and fan motor shall be internally mounted and isolated on a full width isolator support channel using 2" springs. The fan discharge shall be connected to the fan cabinet using a flexible connection to insure vibration -free operation. I. Coil Segment: The cooling coil segment can accommodate 20" of coil space and shall have a full width 4" sloped drain pan extended downstream of the coil to provide sufficient amount of space to contain moisture carryover and shall be furnished with a stainless steel drain pan. J. Coil Removal: All unit coils shall be removable from the unit by the removal of a single (1) wail panel without disturbing roof or adjoining panels of the unit. 99073 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 3 06/01 K. Coils: 1. Cooling coil shall be furnished to meet the performance requirements set forth in the schedule. All coils shall have performance certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410. 2. Coil casing to be constructed of 16 gauge galvanized steel with .006" aluminum die -formed corrugated fins. The fins shall have drawn collars, be belled and mechanically expanded to firmly bond the minimum 5/8" copper tubes to the fins. Header and connections shall be of copper. 3. Drainable water coils shall be designed to operate at 250 psig design working pressure and up to 300F and shall be tested with 325 psig compressed air under water. Circuiting shall provide free and complete draining and venting when installed in the unit. All vent and drain connections shall be extended to the outside of the unit casing. 4. Coils shall be circuited for counter flow of air and water. Water velocities shall not to exceed 7 feet per second and/or exceed the water pressure drops scheduled. All coils must have same end connections and shall be minimum 8 rows and maximum 8 fins per inch. L. Combination Filter/Mixing Box: The combination filter/mixing box shall combine the filtering and mixing functions in one standard segment. Filter media shall be arranged in an angle configuration and shall provide 4" filters with media as specified. The mixing box segment shall consist of multi -leaf, acting blades, with inter -connecting return air and outside air dampers. The section shall have a hinged access door on the drive side of the unit and furnished with magnehelic filter gauge. Filters shall be pleated with a minimum efficiency of 30% per ASHRAE Standard 52-76. M. Standard Low Leak Dampers: Dampers shall be of low leak design having stamped 16 gauge galvanized steel blades. The damper blades shall be provided with a PVC coated polyester fabric mechanically locked into the blade edge. The jamb is a flexible metal, compression type. Leakage shall not exceed 7.20 CFM/square foot at 1 " w.g. and 14.0 CFM/square foot at 4" w.g. The blades shall be opposed acting. N. Access Segment: Access Segment shall be provided in the unit to gain access to a particular area. The access segment shall have a depth of 24" and shall be furnished with access doors on both sides of the unit. 0. Service Lights: Service lights shall be provided in the fan and access sections and shall be furnished with individual on/off switches. 2.4 VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLS - Serves New Air Unit A. General: Establish requirements for variable voltage variable frequency motor controls, for speed control of fans, blowers, or pumps driven with AC motors. Provide IDM GVT series or equal. B. Variable Frequency Motor Control: The control shall be constructed of new materials only. The control shall produce a 3 phase output capable of providing efficient operation of standard NEMA or IEC design AC induction motors. The control shall consist of a power section made up of a fixed AC to DC converter, a fused filter, storage network, and an inverter using either bipolar transistors or IGBT's in the power switching section. The logic control section shall be microprocessor based using a 16-bit processor and VLSI for minimum parts count and maximum reliability. The power section shall be isolated from the control logic between the driver output of the control printed circuit card and the power switching devices. Pulse -Coded Sine Wave reconstruction via IGBT switches. C. Input power: 3 phase, 60 Hz, either 208, 230, or 460 VAC 1. Nominal input voltage +/- 10% 2. Input frequency stability +/- 5% 99073 EQUIPMENT 15700 - 4 06/01 99073' 06/01 2. Comply to IEEE 519-1981 without external modification on a power system with 2% maximum source impedance and a capacity of at least 1.04 times the control full load input current. 3. Comply to FCC subpart J of part 15 for class A computing device from 7 MHZ to 30 MHZ for conduction limit without external modification. D. Output power: 3 phase, 1.5 to 60 Hz with variable voltage to give proper and efficient operation of variable torque load. E. Overload capacity factory set at 125 % for 1 minute, programmable from 100% to 150%. F. Minimum Requirements for Reliable Control Operation: 1 . Fused input door interlocked disconnect 2. Isolated 115 VAC control transformer 3. Digital annunciated fault and limit functions for: a. Thermal overload relay trip b. Microprocessor self -check function c. Output overcurrent trip d. DC bus overvoltage trip e. Inverse time overload trip f. Heatsink overtemperature trip g. DC bus fuse open h. DC bus overvoltage (regen. limit) i. Output ground fault 4. Lamp annunciation for the following functions: a. Inverter ready light b. Inverter run light c. Bypass run light d. Bypass safety lockout light (red) e. Inverter safety lockout light (red) f. Input line power on light g. Control voltage enabled light G. Minimum Required Standard Features: 1. Door mounted components: a. Inverter run indication b. Bypass run indication c. Remote safety lockout indication d. Digital speed (frequency or percent speed) and motor output amp meters e. Manual speed potentiometer f. Inverter / Off / Bypass switch g. Front push-button for fault reset and enable h. Manual / Auto reference selector switch i. Annunciation as in section 4.3 2. Digital fault diagnostic front panel stores and displays up to four faults in sequence of occurrence for fault tracing. 3. DC bus charged indicator 4. Current limit circuit active to prevent nuisance tripping during accel or run conditions. 5. Regeneration limit circuit active to prevent nuisance OV tripping during deceleration. 6. Minimum and maximum speed set, separate and non -interactive. 7. Auto restart selectable after power failure, controller fault, or both. 8. Auto restart after power loss selectable for auto speed mode only. 9. Critical frequency lockout for up to 3 frequencies, available from 0 to 100% speed with adjustable bandwidth of at least 10%. 10. Only non -filament type indicating lights may be used. EQUIPMENT 15700 - 5 11 . Control shall survive, without component failure, and annunciate, output phase to phase and phase to ground faults. 12. Two contactor bypass circuit, electrically and mechanically interlocked, and integral to enclosure with branch circuit protection in accordance with NEC. 13. Control shall have the following isolated instrument signal follower: a. 4 to 20 madc 0 to 10 vdc 3 to 15 psi (optional) setpoint or floating point (optional) b. Loss of reference protection, where the control constantly monitors the input analog speed signals for abnormal changes, i.e. where the analog reference signal changes by more than 90% in 500 msec or less. The control shall then maintain its speed at 80% of the last speed commanded, until such time as the control is commanded to stop or the analog reference returns to normal. c. Volts per hertz ratio shall be automatic, tracking motor load requirements to achieve most efficient operation within the parameters set by 5.16, potentiometer adjustments not allowed. d. Control shall have available 15 selectable volts per hertz patterns, with programmable voltage reduction during run to maximize energy savings. e. Control must be capable of starting into a spinning motor and switching from inverter to bypass back to inverter without delay and without tripping off line of the inverter. Also must be capable of stopping a motor rotating in the reverse direction and then accelerating that motor in the proper direction. f. To reduce possible acoustical noise and electrical interference the control must have an automatically variable carrier frequency from 380 to 17000 hertz. There shall be no sudden frequency shifts which cause acoustical noise increases during shifts in the motor. NEITHER UNIT NOR MOTOR SHALL GENERATE ANY AUDIBLE NOISE ABOVE THAT GENERATED WITH ACROSS -THE -LINE CONNECTION (Cooling fan noise excluded). g. Control shall have a fused door interlocked disconnect with fuses rated for proper branch circuit protection. h. Isolation transformers or line reactors are not allowed. i. Control must comply to IEEE 519-1981 General Systems, Special Applications. j. Control must comply to FCC subpart J of part 15 for class A computing devices, conduction limit between 7 MHZ to 30 MHZ. k. All components must be supplied in an integral enclosure, separate enclosures are not allowed. I. All controls under 150 horsepower will require ETL or equal Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory approval. H. Signal Outputs: 1. Unit shall have one Normally Closed inverter contact and one Normally Closed bypass contact. 2. Each unit shall be furnished with a 0 - 10 Vdc signal output which shall be proportional to unit speed or amperes ( user selectable ). 3. LCD display read out of : a. Reference Input Hertz Output Output Voltage Output Current Output KW. - b. On -the -Fly Programming capability. c. User selectable IGBT switch signalling. d. RS-232 Interface capability. I. Cabinet Construction: 1. Mechanically and Electrically Interlocked Starters with Thermal Overload Protection for Inverter and By-pass. 2. Hinged Door access for Inverter section which allows access to all components with out disconnection of any wiring or removal of any components from unit chassis. 3. Face access to all fusing. 4. Input line fusses to protect the inverter. By-pass fuses to protect the motor. 99073 EQUIPMENT 1 5700 - 6 06/01 5. Hand-held/Door-mounted programming interface module. J. Approval: The variable speed control shall be as manufactured by IDM controls or approved equal. Deviations may not be taken from this specification without prior written approval. All substitutions shall require a sample to be delivered to the approving authority for testing prior to approval. The approving authority shall not be held responsible for any damages to the drive during testing. K. Warranty, start-up, and training: 1. The drive supplier shall include a one year warranty that includes parts and labor and guarantee unit down times not to exceed 24 hours of notification. 2. The drive supplier shall include factory start-up. 3. The drive supplier shall train the owners personnel to identify, test, and replace items in the case of failure. Training shall include programming instruction and basic motor, inverter, and speed control theory. 2.5 FILTERS A. Provide all filters specified herein and/or scheduled or shown on the drawings. All filters shall be erected in holding frames, tight fitting, with no bypass path. B. All filters of every type shall be UL listed Class I or II. C. Every air handling device which supplies air to any space shall have a filter bank. No., size, and type of filters, shall be as scheduled on the drawings. D. All frames shall be fitted with new media at final acceptance. In addition provide 100% spare filters. 2.6 SIDE ACCESS FILTER HOUSINGS 99073 06/01 A. Side access filter housings shall be factory fabricated by the filter manufacturer. Dimensions and capacities shall be as scheduled. B. Housings shall be fabricated from 16 gauge galvanized steel. Housings shall have gasketed access doors on both sides with hinges and sealed with snap acting latches. Gaskets shall be continuous, airtight and replaceable. Filter rails shall receive the filters scheduled with no bypass. Rails shall be convertible to cartridge or bag type filters. Filters shall be retained by adjustable spring tension mechanisms with positive air seal around the frame. C. Side access filters shall have duct flanges on entering and leaving air sides. D. Support the housings on structural steel frames or on concrete pads as required. E. Test with soapsuds after erection to insure air tight construction. F. Manometers: Provide and install a Dwyer gage with level, probes, cocks, and copper tubing across every filter bank. Attach the gage to the filter housing or adjacent duct. END OF SECTION EQUIPMENT 15700 - 7 0 SECTION 15800 ., TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS c _ PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE ., A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air and water, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. Note that certified NEBB TAB services shall be included in the Contract. B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of a: the system. D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, a to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship r4 between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight hour days in a typical room on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire temperature survey period. G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled -, zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. ., H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: - 1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation specified above. 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. 4. Flow rate and temperature at each coil and heating device. 5. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terms of CFM handled. 99073 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15800 - 1 06/01 6. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. I. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. J. When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. 1.3 INSTRUCTIONS A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. .. B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. In addition, provide schematic wiring diagrams of each piece of equipment framed under glass and mounted on the wall as directed. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. END OF SECTION 99073 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15800 - 2 06/01 SECTION 15900 TEMPERATURE REGULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1 .1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials and equipment. Include system schematics indicating all devices, pneumatic piping, electrical wiring and sequence of operation. Sequence of operation shall reference each component device by designation used on schematics. 1.3 SCOPE A. This Contractor shall include in his bid an amount necessary to cover a complete system of automatic temperature regulating equipment. It is intended that the system be pneumatic in its operation except for certain sensing functions, remote starting and stopping provisions, resetting arrangements, and alarm indications which can best be performed by electronic instruments. It shall include all master and submaster thermostats, valves, dampers, and operators, amplifiers, air receivers, switches, piping, air regulator, relays, multiplexers, cabinets, etc. required to make it complete in full accordance with the intent of the plans and the following description. B. The wiring for all the remote indicating, motor control, control set point and adjustment and alarm devices shall originate in a terminal board and extend to and connect to all multiplexers, relays, thermocouples, and similar devices. The wiring shall be performed by the Contractor under this section in accordance with diagrams on the plans, as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings which this contractor shall provide. All wiring required for controls, or for power for controls shall be installed in conduit and provided by the Contractor under this. C. The temperature regulation equipment shall be installed and adjusted to secure the sequences described hereinafter. The materials and equipment described herein shall be sufficient to any of the remote devices of reference elsewhere herein, but shall be arranged as required to operate in conjunction with those remote devices. D. The Contractor shall furnish and install all automatic dampers, and all automatic valves. The `Contractor shall furnish, install, and adjust all damper and valve operators and all other switches, relays, etc. comprising the temperature regulation system. Temperature regulation specified herein is based on Johnson Controls. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 COMPRESSED AIR A. The existing air compressor will be reused to provide control air. This Contractor shall begin at the existing air line, connect 1 " to the service and extend it according to the various requirements cited by, and inherent to, the descriptions herein. A manual valve 99073 TEMPERATURE REGULATION 06/01 15900 - 1 shall be provided to allow isolation of the building from the service. Verify the location of the existing air line. Provide a ball valve at connection point. 2.2 GAUGES A. Provide and install two inch dial pressure gauges at each pneumatic valve and damper operator to indicate its performance. All such gauges shall be identified by a permanent tag or label indicating to which operator they apply. 2.3 THERMOSTATS A. All thermostats shall be of the gradual acting type, except in cases specified herein to the contrary. All shall be adjustable as to set point. B. Thermostats shall be guaranteed to control to plus or minus 1 degree of set point. C. Those for exposed installation in finished areas shall have plain cases and concealed adjustments unless specifically described otherwise herein. D. The interrelationship of reset schedule of all submaster instruments shall be job -adjustable and capable of broad ranges of specific value. E. The locations of all room type thermostats are indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall examine these locations and if, in his opinion, the operation of any instrument would be improved by changing its location, he shall so notify the Architect. With the Architect's approval, he shall install the thermostat in the location of his choice. 2.4 SAFETY LOW LIMIT A. Safety low limits shall be manual reset line voltage type with bellows actuated switches. -- Twenty foot capillary shall be responsive to the coolest section of its length. 2.5 PRESSURE CONTROLLERS A. Differential pressure controllers shall be direct or reverse acting to provide fully proportional control of pneumatic motors and valves. Air pressure output will be varied in relation to the difference in water pressures it senses. B. Static pressure regulators shall be direct or reverse acting with adjustable setpoint and throttling range with field calibration capability. 2.6 STATIC PRESSURE SENSORS A. All static pressure sensors shall be of the force balance feedback, linear output type. The range should be 0-7" of water adjustable in 2" of water spans. B. For certain applications, as listed in the specifications, static pressure sensing and control shall be incorporated in the same instrument. If so, this device shall be direct or reverse acting with a range of 0-8" of water and an adjustable throttling range from 0.02 to 0.5" water and should be capable of being set to control static pressure as small as 0.01 " of water. C. These controllers shall have an adjustable span for setting to ideal curve for use in variable air volume systems. If controllers without adjustable span are used a square root extractor must be used to allow for ideal curve setting. 2.7 CONTROL VALVES, WATER A. All modulating straight -through water valves shall be provided with equal -percentage contoured throttling plugs. All three-way valves shall be provided with linear throttling 99073 TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900 - 2 06/01 .Y. plugs such that the total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardless of the valve's position. B. Valves 3" and smaller shall be screwed type, valves 4" and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be factory -rated to withstand the pressures encountered. Valves shall have - stainless -steel stems and spring -loaded teflon packing. C. Water valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve but not to exceed 5 psi. Valves shall have replaceable seats and discs. 2.8 AIR FLOW CONTROL DAMPERS - A. The temperature control contractor will provide all control dampers of the types indicated on the plans. Frames shall not be less than 13 gauge galvanized steel. Blades must not be over 8 inches wide nor less than .16 gauge galvanized steel roll formed. -'- -Bearings shall be olite, ball bearing or nylon with 1 /2" shafts. Side seals shall be e stainless steel of the tight -seal spring type. Dampers and seals shall be suitable for temperature ranges of -40 degrees to 200 degrees F. •� B. All proportional control dampers shall be opposed or parallel blade type and all two -position dampers shall be parallel -blade types. C. Dampers shall be minimum leakage type to conserve energy and the manufacturer shall submit leakage and flow characteristic data for all control dampers with the temperature control submitted. Maximum leakage shall be 3% at static pressure of 3 inches of W.C. D. All control dampers shall be standard products of the temperature control manufacturer's factory. Local fabrication of dampers is not allowed. 2.9 PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS A. Pneumatic operators shall be sized to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two -position action as specified. B. Where sequencing of actuators is called for such sequencing shall be accomplished by spring ranges adequate for the application. C. Where critical application controllers are used, or where actuators are controlled from pressure sensors, pilot positioners shall be used. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. This Contractor shall design and install the temperature regulation system using components as hereinbefore described to effect the performance functions described hereinafter. Considerable latitude is permitted in the arrangement and selection of components. However, the sequences described must be achieved automatically, within the tolerance specified, without manual manipulation, and any modification to the submitted design required to achieve this result shall be done at no change in the contract price. 3.2 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNITS A. These air units are single zone variable air volume air handling units with chilled water cooling coils, outside air dampers, return air dampers, and inlet vane control on the supply fans. B. Morning Warm -Up Cycle: During the morning warm-up operation, the air unit fans shall be on. The outside air dampers shall remain closed and the chilled water cooling coil obft 99073` 06/01 TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900 - 3 valves shall remain closed. The static air pressure controller located 2/3 down the duct shall modulate the 4-20 mA signal to the VFD to maintain a constant static pressure. C. Normal Daytime Operation: The air handling unit fan shall be on. The outside air �. damper shall open to an adjustable minimum position. A flow control system shall maintain a constant static pressure in the supply duct and shall control the cooling coil discharge temperature to maximize energy efficiency of the system. A static pressure transmitter located approximately 2/3 of the way down each of the 2 trunk ducts of the air unit shall provide a signal to the flow control center which shall modulate the fan inlet vanes to maintain a constant static pressure. The static pressure transmitter shall be of the automatic reset type specified under "Critical Application Controllers." D. An automatic 2-way valve shall control the discharge temperature of the cooling coil at a constant 54 degrees as the air flow varies from 100% design flow down to 60% of designed maximum flow. As the air flow decreases from 60% to 40%, the discharge temperature shall be reset upward from 54 degrees to 58 degrees. The reset schedule shall be fully job adjustable from 25% to 100% air flow and 60 degrees to 50 degrees discharge air temperature. E. The outside air damper shall be interlocked with the air handling unit fan in such a manner that it will not open unless the fan is running and will remain closed during the morning warm-up cycle. A pneumatic manual position switch shall be provided at each air handling unit such that outside air may be adjusted. F. A freeze protection thermostat shall be provided at the inlet of each cooling coil and upon activation shall shut down the air handling unit fan and close the minimum outside air damper. G. A high limit thermostat shall be located in the return and discharge duct to stop the fan above 136 degrees. H. Fire alarm contractor shall provide duct mounted smoke detectors for supply and return air ducts at the unit. Upon detection of smoke, fire alarm shall sound and unit shall stop. 3.3 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS A. Provide pneumatic air to the smoke damper actuators. Provide P/E such that on a signal from the fire alarm system, smoke dampers shall close. 3.4 FAN TERMINAL UNITS (HFS) WITH ZONE HEATING COILS A. These units have an integral fan and motor and primary air damper. The unit manufacturer will furnish normally open damper operators. This contractor shall provide a modulating two way valve in the coil outlet and a load analyzer to monitor a minimum of two points from the thermostats on each respective zone. The air temperature shall be reset to satisfy the space calling for the most heat. B. When the air handling unit fan starts, an air static switch furnished by the unit manufacturer starts the unit blower. C. If the discharge temperature is below the required setpoint, the primary air damper shall modulate toward the closed position. As the primary air quantity decreases, a proportionate amount is taken from the return air plenum to allow a constant volume of air to be delivered by the unit. When the damper is fully closed and all air is being recirculated from the return plenum, the "three way valve shall modulate open to the coil to offset the heat loss. D. If the discharge temperature rises above the required setpoint, the sequence is reversed. As the primary air damper opens to the design inlet CFM, the maximum inlet volume -- controller, furnished by the unit manufacturer, overrides the room thermostat. An E-P switch provided by the unit manufacturer shall close the primary damper when the fan is off. 99073 TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900 - 4 06/01 3.5 FINAL TEST AND ADJUSTMENT A. Upon completion of the installation, the control manufacturer shall make all final adjustments to the system as may be required by actual operating conditions. All throttling range adjustments shall be set as narrow as possible without causing hunting. Setpoints and setup amounts shall be such as to provide satisfactory operation under all load conditions. The operating personnel shall be instructed in the preventive maintenance procedures and in the operating of the control system. The control ,. manufacturer shall submit a letter stating that the control system has been installed under the control manufacturer's supervision and has been adjusted, tested under operating conditions and is operating satisfactorily in accordance with the desired sequence. _ B. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives under direct employ of the Temperature Control Manufacturer shall provide two six -hour periods of instruction to the Owner's operating personnel who have responsibility for the mechanical system. An additional six -hour instruction period shall be given at the beginning of the next heating or cooling season. r C. Provide three sets of complete operating and maintenance instructions with drawings, typewritten instructions and operating sequences, and descriptive data sheets. Assemble each set in a hardcover binder with "Temperature Control" title placed on front cover and binding. r� 3.6 GUARANTEE A. All devices shall be guaranteed to control to plus or minus 1 degree F. System shall be guaranteed for one year after final acceptance. 3.7 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM A. The existing system is a Johnson Metasys DDC control system. Expand and add points per the attached Point Chart. 15900 - 5 DDC POINT CHART POINT TYPE POINT FUNCTION POINT APPLICATION . . .... .. . . AHU-9-)1 Systems Cam!Air Temperature ii■0■0■■0■■■0■■■■■0■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■0■ii■0■■■ Discharge .-. Q■0■0■■0■■■0■■■■■0■■■■■■■■0■■■■000■0■00■■ Reset Temp.nual Comp Room Cold Deck 3-Way Valve 10A, RA Damper (Mix Box) Pressure ..Static MIN onsommosso onsommosommon monsoon Ron IVFD Common Alarm ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■ City of Lubbock Municipal Square Energy Management 1 Fanning Fanning and Associates, inc. C o n s u l t i n g E n g i n e e r s 2555 74th Lubbock, Tx 79423 806 745-2533 SECTION 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS PART1 GENERAL a^ 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SCOPE A. The work included in Division 16 of the Specifications includes all electrical work, interior and exterior to the project. Provide all materials, labor, equipment, transportation, tools, permits, fees, and supervision to install, test and make operational the complete electrical systems. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide and install products in accordance with referenced standards. Comply with the standards listed in each section. B. Codes: The electrical work shall be in accordance with latest edition of the following fi codes: 1. National Electrical Code 2. National Electrical Safety Code ' 3. Life Safety Code 4. Uniform Building Code 5. City of Lubbock Electrical Ordinance 6. State of Texas codes as applicable 7. National Fire Protection Association 8. Other codes as referenced in individual sections C. Material Standards: Materials and equipment shall be listed or labeled as defined in Article 100 of the National Electrical Code (NEC), by a testing agency acceptable to the Owner. Materials shall be marked for their intended use. 1-IS D. Permits and Inspections: Obtain all permits and inspections for the installation of the work and pay all charges incident thereto. Deliver all certificates of inspections issued by authorities having jurisdiction. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Provide submittals for equipment as listed in each Section. B. Submittals shall include descriptive material, catalog sheets, diagrams, performance curves, and charts published by the manufacturer to show conformance with drawings and specifications. C. Provide complete electrical characteristics for all equipment. Lighting submittals shall include photometric data. D. Submittals shall be clearly marked showing the individual item offered E. All electrical submittals shall be bound in a book, indexed by specification section, and certified that they have been checked by the contractor. F. Omissions from the submittal of any material which has been shown on the drawings or specified, does not relieve the contractor from furnishing and installing the item. k 99073 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 1 06/01 1.5 WARRANTY A. The contractor warrants the material and equipment installed to be free from defects for a period of one year after acceptance by the owner. All defects in labor or materials occurring during this period shall be repaired or replaced. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS A. The electrical equipment specified and shown on the drawings is based on information available at the time of design. If the equipment furnished has different electrical requirements, the contractor shall make the required changes to the wire, conduit, controls, overcurrent protection, switchgear, and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the owner. The cost for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this Specification under which the equipment is furnished. 2.2 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be UL labeled where a Standard exists for the product. If the product does not bear the UL label, the manufacturer shall submit documentation from an independent testing laboratory, acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction, showing evidence that the product is suitable for the installation. B. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products in current production of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment. C. All materials shall be new and free from defects. Materials of the same type shall be the product of one manufacturer. D. All material and equipment shall be installed, applied, and handled in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and standards. E. Where no specific material is mentioned, provide the required material from a reputable manufacturer. The material shall conform to the project requirements, and shall be suitable to the engineer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Fabricate, erect, and install the complete electrical systems in accordance with accepted good practice by qualified personnel who are licensed and experienced in such work. Proceed in an orderly manner so as not to impede the progress of the project. 3.2 DRAWINGS A. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic. Carefully coordinate the work with structural, architectural, and mechanical conditions. Make adjustments to avoid conflicts. B. The locations shown for electrical equipment is approximate and not intended to convey the exact details of installation. Exact locations are to be determined in the field by actual measurements. 99073 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 2 06/01 C. The contractor is responsible for fitting the equipment and material into the space. If the equipment furnished requires different space conditions than shown on the drawings, the contractor shall arrange for such space and shall submit a drawing indicating the exact details of installation prior to construction. D. Do not scale drawings. Layout electrical equipment using dimensions obtained from the manufacturer of the equipment and from field measurements. 3.3 SITE INVESTIGATION A. Prior to submitting bids, visit the site and become aware of existing conditions that may affect the cost of the project. Include in the bid the work required to remove, extend, relocate, reconnect or modify existing equipment or systems, and to restore them to their original condition. F 3.4 MATERIALS HANDLING AND STORAGE A. Handle materials in accordance with the manufacturer's standards and recommendations. B. All materials, except those specifically designed to be installed outdoors, shall be stored in an enclosed, dry building or trailer. Protect all stored equipment from damage. Remove damaged materials from the premises. C. Equipment and materials shall not be installed until such time as the environmental conditions of the job site are suitable to protect the equipment and materials. They shall be protected from water, direct sunlight, cold and heat unless designed for such conditions. 3.5 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Sleeve or cut all openings walls, floors, ceilings and roof required to install the electrical work. B. Do not cut structural members unless specific permission is granted by the structural engineer. C. Patch all openings after installation of the work, and repair any damage caused by this activity. Restore the surface to its original condition. 3.6 PAINTING A. Refer to PAINTING Section of these Specifications. B. Touchup scratched or marred surfaces of all electrical equipment with paint obtained from the equipment manufacturers specifically for that purpose. Remove all oil, dirt, grease and foreign material before painting and prepare the surface as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Where plywood backboards are used to mount equipment, paint backboards with two coats of light gray semi -gloss paint. 3.7 TESTING A. Provide all field-testing specified in the individual specification sections. 3.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Provide record documents as required in Division 1 of the specifications. 99073 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 3 06/01 r. 3.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. Provide Operation and Maintenance manuals as required in Division 1 of the specifications. B. Before final inspection, instruct the owner's personnel in operation of the systems under this Division. Use the Operation and Maintenance Manual as basis for the instruction. Review the contents of the manual in detail and explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. C. Prepare and insert additional data in the manual when need for such data becomes apparent during instruction. END OF SECTION 99073 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16010 - 4 06/01 SECTION 16110 �., RACEWAYS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all conduits and fittings. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install all conduits, wireways, raceways, and fittings for all systems ,.. interior and exterior to the building. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. " 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) �^ 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C-80.1 Rigid Galvanized Conduit C-80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 1 Flexible Metal Conduit UL 5 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings UL 6 Rigid Metal Conduit UL 651 Rigid PVC Conduit UL 797 Electrical Metallic Tubing UL 1242 Intermediate Metal Conduit UL 360 Liquid -Tight Flexible Steel Conduit 4. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) RN1 Externally PVC Coated GRS and IMC Conduit PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1 . Metal Conduit and Fittings: a. Allied b. Wheatland !-, c. Appleton d. Raco e. Killark -, f. O-Z / Gedney 99073 RACEWAYS 161 10 - 1 06/01 2. PVC Conduit and Fittings: a. Carlon b. Certainteed 3. PVC Coated Metal Conduit: a. Robroy Industries b. Levy 4. Support Channel: a. Unistrut b. Kindorf 2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND FITTINGS A. Rigid Steel Conduit (GRS) : 1 . Rigid, threaded, galvanized inside and outside or galvanized outside with protective coating inside. 2. Factory made steel threaded couplings. B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): 1. Rigid, threaded, thin wall steel, galvanized outside with protective coating inside. w 2. Factory made steel threaded couplings. C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) : -- 1 . Steel tubing, galvanized outside with slick corrosion resistant interior coating. 2. Steel set -screw couplings and connectors in dry locations; steel compression couplings and connectors in wet locations. D. Flexible Metal Conduit 1. Spirally wound with interlocking galvanized steel strips. Aluminum is not permitted. 2. Flexible conduit shall be approved for use as equipment grounding conductor. 3. Connectors shall be steel, suitable for grounding continuity. E. Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit: 1. Spirally wound with interlocking galvanized steel strips with PVC cover extruded over the exterior to make the conduit Liquidtight. 2. Shall be approved for use as equipment grounding conductor. 3. Shall be steel, suitable for grounding continuity, liquidtight. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS A. All wiring of every description shall be run in conduit or electrical metallic tubing unless noted or specified otherwise. Conduits may be run exposed in machinery and electrical rooms and unfinished areas. All other conduits shall be run concealed unless otherwise noted. All exposed runs shall be installed parallel to the surface of the building in a neat and orderly manner. B. Types: All conduits installed in wet or damp locations, or on roofs shall be rigid galvanized steel conduits. Above grade interior conduits shall be rigid galvanized steel conduit, intermediate metal conduits or electrical metallic tubing. Conduits installed below grade in slabs or buried in earth shall be PVC or PVC coated rigid galvanized steel or wrapped rigid galvanized steel. C. Sizes: Size and install raceways so that conductors may be drawn in without injury or excessive strain. Make field bends with approved bending devices. Do not install bends or offsets in which conduit is crushed, deformed or otherwise injured. D. Connections: Use lengths of flexible metal conduit, not less than 12" long at final connections to all motors, generators, controls and other devices subject to movement 99073 RACEWAYS 16110 - 2 06/01 M a because of vibration or mechanical adjustment. Use flexible metal conduit also at connections to recessed lighting fixtures, and elsewhere as required. In damp or wet locations, and where installed outdoors, use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. E. Around Heat Producing Equipment: Do not install raceways within 3" of steam and hot water pipes, breeching and flues, except where crossings are unavoidable, and then keep raceways at least 1 " from insulation on the pipe, breeching or flue crossed. Wherever possible, avoid installing raceways directly above or in close proximity to boilers and other like objects operating at high temperatures. F. Joining Rigid Conduits: Join with threaded couplings. Ream out all conduit ends after threading. Secure rigid conduits at panel boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, switchboards, support boxes, or sheet metal outlet boxes by galvanized locknuts, inside and outside, with insulating bushing inside. Unthreaded set screw type couplings or connectors are not acceptable in rigid conduit systems. No running threads shall be used anywhere in conduit systems. G. Protection of Raceways: Sea] ends of all raceways with blank discs ("pennies"), push pennies or other approved closers during construction. Do not pull any conductors into raceways until all plastering in the vicinity is completed. Swab out all raceways before pulling in conductors. H. Pull Lines: Install pull line in each empty conduit, including the conduits installed for telephone and computer data systems. I. Penetrations: 1. Exterior Walls: a. Conduit penetrations in exterior walls shall be made with "Link -Seal" as manufactured by Thunderline Corp. Seals shall be modular mechanical type, consisting of interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill the annular space between the pipe and wall opening. Links shall be loosely assembled with bolts to form a continuous rubber belt around the pipe with a pressure plate under each bolt head and nut. After the seal assembly is positioned in the sleeve, tightening of the bolts shall cause the rubber sealing elements to expand and provide an absolutely watertight seal between the pipe and wall opening. The seal shall be constructed so as to provide electrical insulation between the pipe and wall, thus reducing chances of cathodic reaction between these two members. b. Contractor shall determine the required inside diameter of each individual wall opening or sleeve before ordering, fabricating or installing. The inside diameter of each wall opening shall be sized as manufactured to fit the pipe and Link - Seal to assure a watertight joint. If pipe O.D. is non-standard due to coating, insulation, etc. make adjustments before proceeding with wall opening detail. 2. Fire Wall and Smoke Partitions: Penetrate fire walls through sleeves. Seal the opening between the conduit and sleeve with UL rated fire foam sealant to maintain the fire rating of the wall. 3.2 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. Support Spacing: Use minimum spacing as directed by National Electrical Code, but space hangers more closely where required by conditions. B. Vertical Conduit Risers: Support vertical conduits at each floor by means of riser clamps or U-bolts, clamping them to a steel channel bridging the opening in the floor. C. Individual Conduits: Support conduits running vertically or horizontally with galvanized malleable iron one hole clamps. Carry individually supported horizontal conduits 1-1 /4" and larger on Kindorf No. 150 or Steel City No. C-149 hangers. Use no perforated strap iron as hanger material. Where conduits smaller than 1-1 /4" are installed above metal lath and plaster ceilings or mechanically suspended dry ceilings of the non -removable type, they may be supported on ceiling runner channels. Where 99073 RACEWAYS 161 10 - 3 06/01 conduits smaller than 1-1/4" are installed above removable ceilings, attach them to the structure or bar joists (where present) or support them on threaded hanger rods with clips. Do not use any wire to support conduits or to attach conduits to supporting members. Locate conduits a sufficient distance above the ceiling to permit removal of the ceiling panels. Locate them so as not to hinder access to mechanical and electrical equipment through the ceiling panels. D. Multiple Conduits: Where multiple raceways are run horizontally at the same `4 elevations, they may be supported on trapezes formed of sections of Unistrut angle iron or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Size trapeze members including the suspension rods for the number size and loaded weight of the conduits they are to support. Space them as required for the smallest conduit supported. E. Dry -Wall Partitions: Conduits installed in dry -wall partitions shall be firmly secured to the studs. Where conduits rise vertically in the wall, secure at locations near the top and bottom of the run and at intermediate points as necessary to comply with NEC requirements. Support multiple conduits from metal studs using pre -assembled bar hanger assembly consisting of support bar, retaining clips and conduit straps. 3.3 IDENTIFICATION OF BUILDING RACEWAYS A. Building raceways and junction boxes shall be identified as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION section. 3.4 PROTECTION A. Protect raceways as recommended by the manufacturer to insure coatings, finishes, etc. are not damaged. Repair or replace damaged raceways. 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc -rich paint recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touch-up coating recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 CLEANING 99073 06/01 A. Upon completion, clean all installed materials of foreign paint, dirt and construction debris. END OF SECTION RACEWAYS 16110-4 SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data sheets on all conductors and cables and wire. 1.3 SCOPE A. Under this Section, furnish and install all building wires and cables (600 volts and below) complete with connectors and terminations. Exterior branch circuits and feeders are also included in this section. Wiring for communication and alarm systems are included in their respective sections unless they reference this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products which comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (U.L.) UL 44 Thermoset -Insulated Wires and Cables UL 83 Thermoplastic -Insulated Wires and Cables UL 486 Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs UL 510 Insulating Tape PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable. 1. Insulated Cable: a. Southwire Co. b. Senator Wire & Cable Co. c. Okonite d. Anaconda e. Pirelli Cable Co. 2. Electrical Spring Connectors: a. Scotch b. Ideal C. Buchanan 3. Compression Connectors: a. Burndy 99073 WIRES AND CABLES 16120 - 1 06/01 b. Scotch c. Ilsco 4. Mechanical Connectors: a. Burndy b. Scotch c. Ideal 5. Insulating Kits: a. Raychem b. Scotch 6. Insulating Tape: a. Scotch 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Type: Soft drawn copper, UL listed, rated at 600 volts, free from flaws and imperfections. Conductors no. 10 and smaller shall be solid. Conductors larger than no. 10 shall be stranded. B. Insulation: Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, otherwise specified in other Sections, or otherwise required by the National Electrical Code, conductors shall have type THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation. C. High Temperatures: Use type RHH or RHW-2 for wiring in proximity to boilers and other devices subject to high temperatures. D. Markings: Conductors shall be marked on the surface with rated voltage, size, type, and manufacturer. The size shall be repeated at intervals not exceeding 24 inches, with the remaining data repeated at intervals not exceeding 40 inches. E. Performance: Conductors shall be electrically continuous and free from shorts or grounds. All open or shorted conductors shall be replaced. All conductors with damaged insulation shall be removed and replaced with new conductors free from defects. F. Conductors and cables installed open in ceiling plenums shall be plenum -rated. 2.3 JOINTS AND SPLICES A. Solid Conductors (No. 10 AWG and smaller): U.L. approved, screw -on, electrical spring connectors, 600 volt, 105C, insulated. B. Stranded Conductors (No. 8 and Larger): Crimp type compression connectors properly selected for the conductor size and material. All connectors shall be applied with properly sized dies and tools as recommended by the manufacturer. Insulate the splice with an insulating kit providing 600 volt, 90C rating. 2.4 COLOR CODING A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: 1. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green. Grounding conductors from isolated grounding system shall be green with yellow stripes. 2. Equipment grounding conductors, no. 6 awg and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Sizes larger than no. 6 awg shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of green tape, or green adhesive labels. B. Neutral Conductors: 1 . Neutral conductors shall be white or natural gray. 2. Sizes no. 6 awg, or smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Larger sizes shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at 99073 WIRES AND CABLES 16120 - 2 06/01 W every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of white tape or stripped tape or white adhesive labels. �., C. Phase Conductors: 1. Conductors no. 10 awg and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of the conductor. Larger sizes shall be permitted to be identified at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. The marking shall consist of colored tape, or colored adhesive labels. 2. The color -coding system employed shall be permanently posted on the inside door of each branch -circuit panelboard. The posting shall identify the color -coding of each phase conductor and shall be applied to the inside of the door with adhesive. 3. 120/208 volt, 3 phase system: a. Phase A — Black b. Phase B — Red r c. Phase C - Blue PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF WIRING: Install all wiring in raceways unless specified otherwise. A. Wire Pulling: Provide suitable installation equipment for pulling conductors into raceways or conduits. Use ropes of polyethylene, nylon or other suitable material to pull in conductors. Attach pulling lines to conductors by means of woven basket grips or by pulling eyes attached directly to conductors. All conductors to be installed in a single conduit shall be pulled in together. Use U.L. listed cable pulling compound where necessary. B. Cable Lubricants: All cable lubricants shall be UL listed, and shall be certified by their manufacturer to be non -injurious to the insulation on which they are used. C. Wire Sizing: 1. No wire shall be smaller than no. 12, except for signal and control circuits, or Fighting fixture taps. 2. Receptacle and motor branch circuits — Use no. 12 conductors unless noted or scheduled otherwise. 3. 120 volt, 20 amp lighting branch circuits — Where the length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 75 feet use no. 10 conductors; otherwise use no. 12. 4. 277 volt, 20 amp lighting branch circuit — Where the length of run from panelboard to first lighting outlet exceeds 175 feet, use no. 10 conductors; otherwise use no. 12. 5. Where more than three current -carrying conductors are installed in the same conduit or raceway, the conductors shall be increased in size as required to maintain the required ampacity after application of the adjustment factors of NEC Table 310-15(b)(2)(a). 6. All branch circuit wiring connected to the load side of dimmers shall have an individual neutral installed with each circuit. D. Joints and Splices: 1. Make joints and splices only where necessary and only at outlet boxes, wiring troughs and other enclosures permitted by the NEC. All joints shall be mechanically and electrically secure. 2. Do not splice conductors in panelboards, safety switches, switchboards, motor control centers or motor control enclosures. 3. Conductors for use with insulated spring connectors shall be twisted together prior to application of the connector. 99073 WIRES AND CABLES 16120 - 3 06/01 E. Terminations: Tighten electrical connections and terminations in accordance with the manufacturer's published values. A calibrated tool shall be used to insure proper torque values. F. Bundling: Bundle all conductors in panelboards, cabinets, pullboxes and the like using nylon straps made for this purpose. Bundle conductors larger than no. 10 in individual circuits. Bundle smaller conductors in larger groups. G. Identification: Refer to ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION SECTION. 1. Mark conductors to clearly identify each circuit by number. Securely attach to each conductor in each junction box, pull box, panelboard, etc. 2. The cover of each junction box and pullbox shall be marked with the designations of each circuit contained therein. 3. Where colored plastic tape is applied to conductors for identification, use half - lapped turns for a distance of 6 inches from the terminal points and in boxes where taps and splices are made. Apply the last two turns with no tension to prevent unwinding. Use 1-inch wide tape applied to avoid obscuring cable identification markings. 3.2 FIELD TESTING A. Tests and procedures shall be accordance with the applicable IPCEA standards. Furnish all instruments, equipment and personnel required for testing. Submit test data to the engineer on data sheets in a format that can be compared with future testing. All test data shall be included in the project operating manual. 1. Test wires and cables for electrical continuity and short circuits. 2. Prior to terminating, check each feeder conductor with megohmmeter to determine the insulation resistance with respect to ground and other phases. Applied potential shall be 1000 volts do for 1 minute. 3. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturer's recommended values using calibrated torque wrench. 4. Energize circuits and demonstrate proper operation. END OF SECTION 99073 WIRES AND CABLES 16120 - 4 06101 r-� r^ r— SECTION 16130 BOXES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data sheets for all boxes. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install electrical boxes in accordance with the requirements of the National Electrical Code. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) No. 514 Outlet boxes and fittings No. 50 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) No. OS 1 Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports No. FB 1 Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable. 1. Sheet Steel Outlet and Device Boxes: �^ a. Raco b. Steel City c. Appleton 2. Cast Metal Device Boxes: a. Crouse Hinds b. Appleton c. Pyle National P-^ 2.2 OUTLET AND DEVICE BOXES r—, A. All boxes shall be UL listed. 99073 BOXES 16130 - 1 06/01 B. Sheet steel boxes shall be not lighter than 14 gauge, galvanized after fabrication. C. Cast metal boxes shall be cast iron or cast alloy. D. Outlet boxes for switches, receptacles and communications use shall be 4" square with proper square cornered tile wall cover, plaster cover or finishing plate, except where construction will not permit or the device requires a larger box. Box depth shall be as required by NEC for device and wiring volume requirements, but not smaller than 1-1/2 inches. E. Boxes for devices mounted flush in concrete block walls shall be single gang masonry boxes, 3-1 /2" deep. F. Boxes installed in poured concrete shall be concrete -tight type. G. Boxes for surface mounted or pendant fixtures shall be 4"octagonal by 1-1/2" minimum depth. H. Boxes for flush mounted fixtures shall be 4" by 4" size with cover installed above the ceiling and accessible by removing ceiling panel or fixture. Connection to fixture shall be with flexible conduit. I. Boxes for interior exposed work shall be cast metal boxes (Cast iron or cast alloy). J. Boxes for outdoors shall be cast metal boxes with gasketed covers. 2.3 PULLBOXES AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet steel galvanized inside and outside , with galvanized covers. B. Dimensions shall be as required by NEC for the number, size and locations of conduits entering the box. C. Boxes installed above ceilings shall be accessible by removing ceiling panels, installing access door in hard ceiling, or flush mounting the cover on the ceiling. D. Boxes installed flush in walls in finished areas shall have overlapping trim with hinged door and lock to match the appearance of electrical panelboard. E. All boxes shall have covers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide at each outlet or device of whatever character a metal outlet box in which conduits shall terminate. B. All pull and junction boxes shall be accessible after construction is complete. Install access panels in the construction as required to make the box accessible. C. Fasten all boxes securely to the building construction, independent of conduit systems. D. Where outlet box on grid ceiling supports surface or suspended fixture, provide box with fixture stud and secure the box to ceiling members with steel channel. E. Outlet boxes for devices shown back to back shall be offset a minimum of 6 inches. F. All boxes shall have covers and unused conduit openings shall be covered. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Circuit numbers shall be marked on junction box covers as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION section. B. Color code junction boxes as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION section. END OF SECTION 99073 BOXES 16130 - 2 06/01 EA SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all wiring devices. 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install in suitable outlet boxes, the wiring devices indicated complete with coverplates. All shall be properly connected to conductors so as to be operable. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) WD 1 General Requirements for Wiring Devices WD 6 Wiring Devices — Dimensional requirements 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 20 General -Use Snap Switches PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Hubbell 2. Leviton 3. Pass & Seymour 4. General Electric 5. Bryant 2.2 CLASSIFICATION A. All wiring devices shall be UL listed. B. All wiring devices shall be specification grade. 99073 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1 06/01 2.3 COLORS A. All devices shall have white finish where mounted in walls finished in light colors and a brown finish where mounted in walls finished in dark colors. 2.4 SWITCHES A. The catalog numbers listed are of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices from listed manufacturers are acceptable. Furnish switches in colors specified above even though the numbers listed may not contain the correct suffix. 1. Single pole wall switch — 1221. 2. Three-way wall switch — 1223. 3. Four-way wall switch — 1224. 4. Pilot -lighted switch — 1221-PLC. 5. Momentary contact switch — 1556. 2.5 RECEPTACLES A. The catalog numbers listed are of Hubbell manufacture. Equivalent devices from listed manufacturers are acceptable. Furnish receptacles in colors specified even though the numbers listed may not contain the correct suffix. 1. Duplex receptacle: 20 amp, 125 volt, grounding (NEMA 5-20R) — No. 5362. 2. Ground Fault Interrupter Receptacle (GFI) — No. GF-5362. 3. Special Receptacles: Furnish devices in the NEMA configuration listed on the drawings. 2.6 WEATHERPROOF DEVICES A. Provide the specified device in weatherproof cast box with gasketed coverplate. 2.7 COVERPLATES A. Provide coverplates for all wiring devices, including telephone, signal outlets and other _ devices. Coverplates shall be one piece single or multi -gang type as required. 1. Indoor Flush Devices: a. High abuse nylon plates matching the color of the device covered. 2. Indoor Surface Devices: For indoor devices use zinc -coated metal with rounded or — beveled edges, same size as the box. 3. Outdoor devices: TayMac PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install wiring devices plumb and level. B. Install SPST wall switches with OFF position down. C. Wall switches shall be installed on the strike side of the door as finally hung. D. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. E. Install devices within outlet boxes to allow coverplates to be in full contact with the wall on all sides. F. Replace broken devices and plates with new. G. Clean all paint, plaster and dirt from wiring devices and plates. 99073 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2 06/01 3.2 MOUNTING HEIGHTS A. Where mounting heights are indicated on the drawings, the device shall be installed with the centerline of the device at the indicated height. B. Devices noted to be installed above counters or millwork shall be installed above the backsplash. C. Unless otherwise noted on the drawings, or directed by architect, install devices at the following heights above finished floor: DEVICE MOUNTING HEIGHT Wall switch 48” Receptacle 18" Wall dimmer switch 48" Clock hanger outlet 12" below ceiling Wall mounted clock 12" below ceiling Telephone outlet 18" 3.3 IDENTIFICATION A. At each wiring device mark the inside of the coverplate with the panel and circuit number to which the device is finally connected. Use black indelible marker. 3.4 FIELD TESTING A. Energize lighting circuits and operate each wall switch to verify proper operation. B. Energize receptacle circuits and test each receptacle with circuit tester to verify the device is energized and has correct polarity. C. Test TRIP and RESET buttons on GFI receptacles. In addition, test GFI receptacles with a GFI tester to verify it trips at 4ma of ground current. 99073 06/01 END OF SECTION WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3 SECTION 16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. r 1.2 SUBMITTALS : A. Submit product data sheets for all grounding equipment. r" 1.3 SCOPE A. Furnish and install grounding equipment and systems as specified herein. Also refer ,... to, and comply with specific grounding requirements contained in other Sections. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1 . National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) Standard 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System 3. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 467 Grounding and Bonding Equipment r- PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Grounding Products: a. Chance / Hubbell b. Copperweld Corp C. Erico Inc. d. Ideal Industries, Inc. e. ILSCO f. Kearney / Cooper Power Systems g. Lyncoln XIT Grounding h. Superior Grounding Systems, Inc. i. Thomas and Betts j. Raco, Inc. k. Burndy 99073 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170 - 1 06/01 2.2 CONDUCTORS A. Equipment Grounding Conductors: 1 . Use insulated conductors that comply with WIRES AND CABLES Section. 2. Equipment grounding conductors shall be green. 3. Isolated ground conductors shall be green with yellow stripes. 4. No. 6 AWG and smaller shall have continuous color -coding the entire length of conductor. Larger sizes shall be identified with color -coded plastic tape at each end, and at every point where the conductor is accessible. For equipment grounding conductors use green tape. For isolated ground conductors use alternating bands of green and yellow tape with a minimum of three bands of green and two bands of yellow. B. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Insulated stranded cable complying with WIRES AND CABLES Section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A, Comply with NEC Article 250 for types, sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NEC are indicated. B. Install a separate, green -insulated, equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and each branch conduit. Install the grounding conductor in the same raceway with related phase and neutral conductors, and connect to pull boxes or outlet boxes at intervals of 100 feet or less. Where paralleled conductors in separate raceways occur, provide a grounding conductor in each raceway. Connect the grounding conductors to bare grounding bars in panelboards, and ground busses in service equipment to the end that there will be an uninterrupted grounding circuit from the point of a ground fault to the point of connection of the equipment ground and system neutral. C. Install equipment grounding conductors in nonmetallic raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables. D. Install equipment grounding conductors in all flexible metal conduit and liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. 3.2 FIELD INSPECTION AND TESTING A. Inspection: Visually verify proper grounding connections at distribution panels and branch circuit panels. END OF SECTION 99073 GROUNDING AND BONDING 16170 - 2 06/01 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION PART1 GENERAL 6"* 1.1 NOTE -, A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SCOPE A. Provide and install electrical identification for electrical conductors and equipment. ^. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with National Electrical Code (NEC). B. Comply with UL Standard 969. C. Comply with ANSI C2. D. Comply with NEMA WC-1 and WC-2. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by (but not limited to) the following companies are acceptable. 1. W. H. Brady 2. Ideal Industries, Inc. 3. Seton Nameplate Co. 4. Panduit Corp. 2.2 EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS A. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145. B. Engraved Plastic Nameplates: 1 . Melamine plastic laminate, minimum 1 /16" thick for signs up to 20 sq. inches, and 1 /8" thick for larger sizes. 2. White letters on black face for equipment connected to normal power system. 3. White letters on red face for equipment connected to emergency power system. 4. Attach with self -tapping stainless -steel screws, except contact -type permanent adhesive can be used where screws can not or should not penetrate the surface. 2.3 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS A. Color -Coded Plastic Tape: Provide manufacturer's standard self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1-1/2" wide. B. Identification Bands: Provide manufacturer's standard vinyl or vinyl -cloth, self- adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters to show circuit identification. s, 99073 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 1 06/01 2.4 UNDERGROUND LINE WARNING TAPE A. Permanent, bright colored, continuous printed, vinyl tape. 1. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick. 2. Compounded for permanent direct burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. 4. Printed legend indication type of underground line. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install electrical identification products in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements of NEC and OSHA. B. For items attached with adhesive, degrease and clean the surface as recommended by the manufacturer. C. Where items attach to surfaces that require painting, attach after completion of painting. D. Install signs at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. E. Identification on Raceways and Boxes: 1. Every box containing circuit wiring shall have the circuit numbers marked on the outside cover of the junction box. Use indelible marker with wide tip. Markings for normal circuits shall be black, and shall be red for emergency circuits. 3.2 CONDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION A. Apply conductor identification on each conductor in each box, enclosure, cabinet and panel. B. Refer to Section 16120 for color -coding of conductors. 3.3 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION A. Install engraved, plastic laminate sign on each unit of electrical equipment, including central or master unit of each system. This includes power, lighting, communication, signal, and alarm systems unless the units contain their own self-explanatory identification. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with '/z" high lettering on 1- 1/2" high sign (2" high where 2 lines are required). C. Text shall match the notations used on the drawings for identification. 3.4 IDENTIFICATION OF PANELBOARDS, SWITCHBOARDS, AND SWITCHGEAR A. Install engraved plastic laminate sign containing 3 lines of text. The top line shall be the panel name. The center line shall indicate the panel voltage, and the bottom line shall indicate the source of supply. B. Signs for equipment fed from the normal system shall have white letters on black background, and equipment fed from the emergency system shall have white letters on red background. 99073 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 2 06/01 C. An example of the required identifications is: Panel 4HA 277/480 Fed From Panel 4DP END OF SECTION e^, r� 1� AR p�1 99073 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 3 06/01 r; SECTION 16441 SAFETY SWITCHES PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for review: 1. Complete drawings showing dimensions. 2. Conduit entry/exit locations. 3. Voltage rating, continuous current rating, and short circuit rating. 4. Cable terminal size. 5. Fuse rating and type. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide, install, and connect all safety switches shown on the drawings or required by codes. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1 . National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 50 Enclosures for electrical Equipment UL 98 Enclosed and Dead -Front Switches 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) No. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1 . Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric 4. Siemens 99073 SAFETY SWITCHES 16441 -1 06/01 2.2 HEAVY DUTY SWITCHES A. Requirements: Provide and install safety switches as shown on the drawings or as required by NEC. Where code requires the installation of safety switches that are not shown on the drawings, provide and install the required switches. B. All switches shall be heavy-duty type. C. Switches shall be fusible or non -fusible as noted on the drawings or as required by codes. D. Provide switches with the voltage and current ratings as shown on the drawings. E. Where safety switches serve as motor or motor starter disconnects, provide — horsepower rated switches with auxiliary contacts to disconnect all power and control circuits. F. Construction: 1 . Switch blades and jaws shall be plated copper. 2. Switches shall have a handle that is easily padlockable in the OFF position. 3. Switches shall have defeatable door interlocks that prevent the door from opening when the handle is in the ON position. 4. Switch assembly and operating handle shall be an integral part of the enclosure base. 5. Switches rated 100A to 600A shall have reinforced fuse clips. 6. Switch blades shall be readily visible in the OFF position. 7. Switch operating mechanism shall be non-teasible, positive quick -make / quick - break type. 8. Fusible switches shall be suitable for service entrance equipment. 9. Switches shall have line terminal shields. 10. Switches shall have CU/AL mechanical lugs. G. Enclosures: -` 1. Where installed indoors, all enclosures shall be NEMA I, general purpose type unless otherwise noted. 2. Where installed outdoors, all enclosures shall be NEMA 3R, raintight type unless _ otherwise noted. 3. Where noted on the drawings, provide the following enclosures: a. NEMA 4 - watertight (304 stainless steel). b. NEMA 12 - dust tight/oil tight. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install safety switches in accordance with manufacturers written instructions and NEC requirements. B. Install adjacent disconnects at the same height. C. Install disconnects to maintain the required NEC clearances and working space. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color -code conductors in safety switches as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. B. Install engraved plastic sign on each safety switch as specified in ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. C. The sign shall contain 3 lines of text. The top line shall identify the load served. The center line shall indicate the voltage. The third line shall indicate the source of supply. 99073 SAFETY SWITCHES 16441 -2 06/01 D. An example of the required identification is: AHU #2 480 V Fed From Panel PP 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Visually inspect each switch for proper grounding connections as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. 2. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors in safety switches as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. 3. Verify fusible switches contain proper type and size of fuses. B. Testing: 1. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. 2. Operate each switch ON and OFF four times to verify proper operation. 3. Energize circuit and verify proper operation. END OF SECTION 99073 SAFETY SWITCHES 06/01 16441 - 3 SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE r- A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit the following information for review: 1. Complete drawings showing dimensions. 2. Conduit entry/exit locations. 3. Voltage rating, continuous current rating, and short circuit rating. 4. Cable terminal sizes. ,.., 5. Catalog product sheets. 6. Nameplate Identification. 1.3 SCOPE A. Provide, install, and connect all electrical panelboards shown on the drawings and specified herein. Panels shall be complete assemblies including enclosures, bussing, overcurrent protective devices, and trim. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards. Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. These Standards are incorporated into this Specification by reference. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) UL 50 Cabinets and Boxes UL 67 Panelboards UL 489 Molded Case Breakers / Enclosures 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) PB-1 Panelboards No. 250 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment AB-1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: .-. 1. Square D 2. Cutler Hammer 3. General Electric a., 4. Siemens 99073 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 1 06/01 2.2 PANELBOARD REQUIREMENTS A. All panelboards shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Panels shall be arranged for flush mounting, surface mounting, or free-standing as indicated on the drawings. C. Panels shall have the voltage ratings, continuous current ratings, and interrupting ratings as scheduled on the drawings. D. All panelboard accessories and features scheduled or specified on the drawings shall be provided. E. Where a circuit protective device is scheduled as a "spare", provide the device complete for operation. Where the device is scheduled as a "space" or "space only", provide proper space and all necessary connectors for future installation of the size of device scheduled. Where the device is scheduled to serve a "future" load, provide the device complete for operation. F. All circuit breakers shall be quick make, quick break, trip free, thermal magnetic indicating type unless otherwise noted. G. Branch circuit breakers shall be fully interchangeable without disturbing adjacent units. H. Connect all overcurrent protective devices with sequence phasing. I. Provide each panelboard with a neatly typewritten directory of circuits mounted in a -- plastic covered cardholder on the inside of the panelboard door. J. Install laminated plastic nameplate for each panel as specified under ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION A. Cabinets: 1. Rigidly constructed of galvanized sheet steel per UL 50 Standards. Corners shall be overlapped or welded with the edges turned over to receive trim. 2. Where two -section panels are required, both sections shall be same height, and have fully rated bussing in separate cabinets connected by conduit nipples. B. Trim: 1. Fabricated from sheet steel meeting the requirements of UL 50 Standards. Trim shall have medium gray enamel finish suitable to serve as the final finish, or suitable to receive field painting. 2. Trim door shall have rounded corners and edges free from burrs. 3. Surface trims shall be the same height and width as box. Flush trims shall overlap the box %" on all sides. 4. Furnish each door with substantial flush, cylinder tumbler lock and catch. Doors more than 48" high shall have auxiliary fasteners. Provide each lock with 2 keys. All locks shall be keyed alike. 5. Unless noted otherwise, interior mounted panels shall have type 1 fronts (one piece with hinged door). Where door -in -door construction is specified, it shall consist of a hinged door within a piano -hinged cover secured with trim clamps. 6. Exterior mounted panels shall be type 3R in accordance with UL 50 requirements. All doors shall be gasketed and be equipped with a tumbler type vault lock and two additional trunk type latches. C. Bussing: 1. All bussing shall be plated copper sized in accordance with UL Standards to limit temperature rise on any current -carrying part to a maximum of 65 degrees C above an ambient of 40 degrees C maximum. 2. Main lugs and main breakers shall be UL approved for copper or aluminum conductors sized to accommodate the conductors to be terminated. Provide 99073 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 2 06/01 , oversized lugs to terminate conductors that are increased in size due to voltage drop or temperature requirements. ,. 3. A bolted ground bus shall be included in all panels. Where scheduled, an isolated ground bus shall also be included. 4. A full size (100%) neutral bar shall be furnished for panels shown with neutral. Neutrals shall have suitable lugs for each outgoing feeder requiring neutral connection. Where scheduled, provide 200% rated neutrals with lugs for oversized neutral conductors. 2.4 DISTRIBUTION PANELS — CIRCUIT BREAKER TYPE A. Distribution panels with bolt -on devices contained therein shall have fully rated interrupting ratings to interrupt fault current values indicated on the drawings. "Breakers shall be molded case type. B. Molded case circuit breakers shall provide overcurrent and short circuit protection with inverse time and instantaneous tripping characteristics. Also provide ground fault protection where scheduled. C. Circuit breakers shall operate by toggle -type handle and shall be quick make, quick - break switching mechanism that is mechanically trip -free. Automatic tripping of the �-, breaker shall be clearly indicated by the handle position. 2.5 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELS A. Bolt -in type, heavy duty, quick -make, quick -break, single and multi -pole molded case circuit breakers with toggle handles that indicate when unit has tripped. B. Circuit breakers shall be thermal magnetic type with common handle for all multiple pole breakers. C. Breakers shall be UL listed as type SWD for lighting circuits. D. Circuit breaker handle locks shall be provided for all circuits that supply exit signs, emergency lights and fire alarm panels. E. Breakers shall be fully rated to interrupt the fault current values scheduled on the drawings. F. Provide breaker accessories as scheduled on the drawings. G. Where a lighting and appliance panelboard contains more than 42 branch overcurrent devices, the assembly shall consist of two or more separate boxes with each box containing not more than 42 branch overcurrent devices. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with manufacturers written instructions, NEMA r" PB1.1 and NEC standards. B. Panelboard enclosures shall be securely fastened to the structure with a minimum of four bolts or screws. ,., C. Clean dirt and foreign paint from exterior and interior of all panels. D. Do not splice conductors in panels. E. Conductors not terminating in panelboard shall not extend through or enter panel enclosure. F. A single conductor shall terminate in each lug on a circuit breaker. Do not terminate multiple conductors under a single lug. 99073 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 3 �, 06/01 G. During installation carefully balance the electrical loads between the various phases. This may require connecting loads to circuits different from the circuit numbers indicated on the drawings. 3.2 IDENTIFICATION A. Identify and color -code conductors in panelboards as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. B. Install panelboard nameplate identification as specified under ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION Section. C. Provide individual circuit identification for each circuit with a type -written directory of circuits mounted in a holder on the inside of the panel door. The directory shall identify the type or name of the load served along with the room names and numbers. The room names and numbers shall be the final names and numbers assigned to the space and not those used on the drawings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: 1. Visually inspect each panel for proper grounding connections as specified under GROUNDING AND BONDING Section. 2. Visually inspect breakers and switches for broken parts and loose terminals. 3. Visually verify proper color -coding of conductors as specified under WIRES AND CABLES Section. 4. Visually verify panelboard trim fits properly with no gaps between the trim and panel enclosure. B. Testing: 1. Test cable mechanical connections to the manufacturers recommended values with calibrated torque wrench. 2. Operate each breaker ON and OFF to verify proper operation. 3. Energize circuits and demonstrate proper operation. 4. When the facility is under normal use, amperage measurements shall be taken on each phase conductor in each panel feeder, and any unbalances shall be corrected to a point that no conductor load shall be more than 5% high or low (maximum unbalance of 10%). END OF SECTION 99073 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 4 06/01 e■- PART1 GENERAL 1.1 NOTE SECTION 16510 LIGHTING A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data sheets for all lighting products. B. Submit complete photometric data for each fixture. 1.3 SCOPE ,... A. This Section pertains to all labor, material, equipment and services necessary for and incidental to the complete interior and exterior lighting system as shown on the drawings and specified herein. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Referenced Standards: Provide products that comply with the referenced standards. 1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) No. 70 National Electrical Code (NEC) No. 101 Life Safety Code 2. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) C82.1 Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts C82.4 HID Lamp Ballasts 3. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) LE 4 Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) UL 542 Lampholders, Starters for Fluorescent Lamps •, UL 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment UL 1029 HID Lamp Ballasts UL 1570 Fluorescent Lighting Fixtures UL 1571 Incandescent Lighting Fixtures r' UL 1572 HID Lighting Fixtures �^ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Subject to project requirements, products manufactured by the following companies are acceptable: 1. Ballasts: a. Advance b. Lutron c. General Electric d. Valmont 99073 06/01 LIGHTING 16510 - 1 2. Lamps: a. Osram/Sylvania b. General Electric C. Philips 2.2 LUMINAIRES A. Provide and install a lighting fixture on each lighting outlet shown. Furnish fixtures in accordance with the designations scheduled on the drawings. Should any designation be omitted on the drawings, furnish fixtures of the same type as used in rooms of similar usage. All features scheduled for fixtures shall be provided, even if the catalog number given in the schedule lacks the required numerals, prefixes of suffixes corresponding to the feature called for. 2.3 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. Fixtures shall bear UL label. B. Lenses shall be 100% virgin acrylic with nominal thickness of 0.125 inches. 2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS A. Use ballasts from manufacturers listed above. Generic ballasts from other manufacturers are not acceptable. 1. General Requirements: a. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated for full light output. b. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10%. c. Sound Rating: A d. Power Factor: 95% minimum 2. Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: a. CBM labeled b. Encapsulated c. Parallel Lamp Circuits: Multiple lamp ballasts connected to maintain full light output on surviving lamps if one or more lamps fail. 2.5 LAMPS A. Fluorescent Lamps: 1. Color Temperature: 3500 K 2. CRI: 86 or higher 3. Lamp types as scheduled on the drawings. B. HID Lamps: 1. Metal Halide Color Temperature: 3600 K 2. CRI: 70 or higher 3. Phosphor coated unless otherwise specified. 4. All metal halide lamps used in open fixtures where people may be exposed to ultraviolet radiation shall be the type that will automatically extinguish when the outer envelope is broken. This feature shall be provided regardless of the lamp code listed in the fixture schedule. 5. Provide HID lamps with correct burning position selected for the fixture orientation and mounting. 99073 LIGHTING 16510 - 2 06/01 r" r-* e-s PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Installation of Interior Fixtures: Outlet box locations shown for fluorescent fixtures are diagrammatic. Locate boxes to coincide with stem hangers where such occur. Fixtures shall be level, square with the general construction and securely attached. B. Lay -in Type Fixtures: Refer to the ceiling installer's layout for exact location. Center the fixtures in ceiling grids. Wire the fixtures using concealed outlet boxes accessible through ceiling panels. Install conductors in flexible metallic conduit from box to fixture. C. Fixtures in Plaster Ceilings: Provide a suitable plaster ring or frame for each fixture recessed in a plaster ceiling. D. Surface Mounted Fixtures: Fixtures shall be installed flush with the ceilings. Where fixtures are mounted to an exposed grid ceiling, the fixtures may be clipped to the ceiling grid provided the attachment holds the fixture flush, level, and secure. Where they cannot be centered on a grid, install a structural member to span two tees and attach the fixture to the structural members. E. Where fixtures are installed in a continuous row, the row shall be straight and plumb. Lens shall be aligned in all planes and no part of the lamp shall be visible. END OF SECTION 99073 LIGHTING 06/01 16510 - 3